Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 234

PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008

Service Manual

AvantGuard®
Electric Bed
LI158Bx

QD2320
Rev.003 EN
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008

AvantGuard® 1
Electric Bed
Service Manual
2

Revision index

Revision N° Affected pages Date


3
001 Original April 2004
002 All February 2007
003 All September 2008

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page i
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Revision index

1 Manufacturer:
Hill-Rom S.A.S
B.P. 14 - Z.I. du Talhouët
56330 PLUVIGNER - FRANCE
www.hill-rom.com
Third edition, first printing 2004

2 Printed in Europe
QD2320, Rev. 003/September, 2008

The information contained in this manual is confidential and may not be reproduced or
divulged in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hill-Rom.
3 Hill-Rom®, AvantGuard®, Cliniplot®, Duo® 2, EasyChair®, MobiBar® are registered
trademarks of Hill-Rom Services, Inc.
Clinisert™ 2, Primo™, TotalGuard™ are registered trademarks of Hill-Rom Services, Inc.
Allen® is a registered trademark of Industrial Fasteners, Inc.
Loctite® is a registered trademark of Loctite Corporation, Inc.

4 Torx® is a registered trademark of Textron, Inc.


Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.
Hill-Rom reserves the right to make changes to the design, characteristics and models
without prior notice. The only warranty Hill-Rom makes is the express written warranty
extended on the sale or rental of its products.
To order copies of this manual, refer to the last page, identify your national Hill-Rom
representative and order the article with the part number QD2320.
5 © 2008 by Hill-Rom Services, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

7
Page ii AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Contents

Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Chapter 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Chapter 3: Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Chapter 4: Removal, Installation and Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 -1
Chapter 5: Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Chapter 6: General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Chapter 7: Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Bed model and country of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
Typographical conventions used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
Glossary of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
Bed positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
HiLow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12
Retractable head section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12
CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12
Adjustable thigh section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 13
Adjustable foot section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 13
Autocontour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 13
EasyChair®* function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 14
Lateral caregiver unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 14
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Standard steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Headboard and footboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Hard surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Fastening points for restraining straps* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16

AvantGuard™ Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page iii


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Contents
Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
IV pole and patient helper receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17
Available functions vary depending on bed model* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 20
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 20
Electric description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
Power-driven actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23
Regulatory requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23
Model Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 24
Safety Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 24
Identification and caution labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 28
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Initial actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Problem/Solution Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4
Final actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
No functions work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
Malfunction of the control unit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12
Malfunction of lock-out mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 14
Malfunction of the HiLow function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15
Malfunction of the ATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 17
Malfunction of the AHS (autocontour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 18
Malfunction of the electric function management mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 20
Backup battery mode malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 22
Malfunction of the AFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 23
Malfunction of the power-driven AFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 25
Malfunction of the EasyChair® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 26
Malfunction of the T/RT function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 27
The “Shock” function is inoperative when the bed is connected to the mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 28
The “Shock” function is inoperative when the bed is not connected to the mains . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 29

Page iv AvantGuard™ Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Contents
“Bed connected to AC power, brake not applied” Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 31
The CPR function is inoperative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 33
The foot siderail support lock/unlock mechanism is inoperative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 34
The head siderail lock/unlock mechanism is inoperative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 35
Faulty brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 36
Faulty steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 37
Faulty steering with the controlled operation 5th wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 38
Chapter 3: Theory of operation
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Component positioning and electrical diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Configurations and wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
Technical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Mechanical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Retractable head section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Emergency CPR Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Power-driven foot section* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
HiLow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
Standard steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
5th wheel system with controlled operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
Construction of the long metal siderails* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
Construction of the TotalGuard™ siderails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Foot siderail supports* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Construction of the long metal siderails* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Headboard and footboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Plastic headboard and footboard* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Plastic lockable footboard* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Headboard and footboard with wooden trim* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Electrical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
Power supply unit characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
The power stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
Function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
Battery circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 14
Battery characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 14
Control logic circuits, specific functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15

AvantGuard™ Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page v


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Contents
Control pendant* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Control unit on a flexible arm* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Lateral caregiver unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Motor characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
“Bed is not in low position” detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
Autocontour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
EasyChair®* function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
“Shock” function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
"Bed connected to mains, brake not applied" detection* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
Trendelenburg/Reverse Trendelenburg* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
Tool and supply requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
Securing and locking out the electric functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
PSU cover and central rail cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Replacing the hard surfaces of the SS, TS and FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
Replacing the HS hard surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
Replacing the control pendant* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
Replacing the control unit on a flexible arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
Replacing the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
Replacing the power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
Replacing the backup battery and the Shock* function battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
Replacing a lateral caregiver unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
Replacing the LCU/CUFA circuit box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20
Replacing the adjustable head section motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Replacing the CPR Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22
Replacing the adjustable thigh section motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
Replacing the adjustable foot section motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27
Replacing the head HiLow column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 29
Replacing the foot HiLow column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 32
Replacing the HiLow* pedal or the foot-operated control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 37
Replacing the bed brake detection contact subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 38
Replacing the brake/steer bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39
Replacing the caster, the brake caster and the steering caster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43

Page vi AvantGuard™ Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Contents
Replacement of the 5th wheel with controlled operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 48
Replacing the adjustable head section dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 50
Replace the gas-powered actuator and cable subassembly and the mechanical AFS duct. . . . 4 - 53
Replacing head siderail and TotalGuard™elevation arm subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 55
Replacing a central elevation arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 56
Replacing a TotalGuard™ foot siderail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 58
Replacing a TotalGuard™ foot siderail support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 59
Replacing the long metal siderail supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 60
Replacing the foot and headboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 61
Replacing the supports for wooden footboards or lockable plastic endboards* . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 62
Replacing the linen holder table* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 63
Replacing the extension* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 64
Replacing the egress handle* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 66
Chapter 5: Spare parts
Ordering spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
Exchange Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
In-warranty exchanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
Out-of-warranty exchanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
Recommended spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3
Chassis - Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
HiLow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
5th wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
HiLow pedal/foot-operated control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
Intermediate structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
Adjustable head section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
Adjustable thigh and foot sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
Plastic endboard extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Wooden endboard extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
Electric power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
Control units (LCU – CP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
Control unit on a flexible arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
Head siderails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Foot siderail attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22
Foot siderails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23

AvantGuard™ Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page vii


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Contents
Headboard, footboard and lockable footboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Wooden headboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Wooden endboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
Metal headboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
Metal footboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
Grounding - Ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
Hard surfaces and linen holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30
Metal siderail before 06-12-2006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32
Metal siderail after 06-12-2006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
AC963: syringe-driver holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38
AD128A: monitor stand table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
AD081B: adjustable patient helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
AD082A: telescopic IV pole with four hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41
AD142A: removable frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
AD165A: telescopic IV pole with four hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43
Chapter 6: General procedures
Cleaning and care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Steam cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Hard to Clean Spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Disinfecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Storing the bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Lubrication requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
Preventive Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
Preventive maintenance checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 -13

Chapitre 7 : Accessories
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Accessory support bar kit - AD126A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
Medical device support bar kit - AD127A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5
MobiBar® egress handle kit – AD134A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7
Control unit on a flexible arm kit AD166A - AD174A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 9
HiLow pedal kit - AD137A* or AD171A* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12

Page viii AvantGuard™ Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008

Chapter 1 1
Introduction
Purpose

2
This manual provides the information for the normal operation and maintenance of the Hill-
Rom AvantGuard® electric bed. It also includes a complete parts list that can be used to order
spare parts. The parts list is in Chapter 5.

Audience
This manual is intended for use by facility-authorized personnel. Use by unauthorized personnel
may result in damage to the equipment and/or serious injury to staff or users.

Organization
3
This Service Manual contains seven chapters.

Chapter 1: Introduction
In addition to a brief description of this Service Manual, Chapter 1 also provides a product
overview.

Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures


Chapter 2 includes the Repair Analysis Procedures for the AvantGuard® electric bed. Use these
4
procedures to gather information, identify maintenance requirements and verify the
effectiveness of the repair.

Chapter 3: Operating principle

5
Chapter 3 describes the operating principles of the mechanical and electric parts of the
AvantGuard® electric bed.

Chapter 4: Removal, Installation and Adjustment Procedures


Chapter 4 describes the removal, installation and adjustment procedures of the parts presented
in Chapter 2.

Chapter 5: Spare parts


Chapter 5 contains the Hill-Rom warranty, the part ordering procedure and illustrated parts lists.

Chapter 6: General procedures


6
Chapter 6 describes the procedures for cleaning, preventive maintenance and other general
procedures.

Chapter 7: Accessories

7
Chapter 7 presents the accessories that can be used with the AvantGuard® electric bed and the
installation procedures.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 1


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Bed model and country of use
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 Bed model and country of use


Certain bed features can be added and are available (or not) depending on the country of use.
These features are identified with an asterisk (*).
LI158Bx: AvantGuard® Electric Bed model 1200.
NOTE:
The AvantGuard® Electric Bed model 1400 (LI159Bx) was withdrawn from the range in May

2 2004. The specific functions of this model are now available on the AvantGuard® Electric Bed
model 1200.

Typographical conventions used in this manual


This manual contains different typefaces and icons designed to improve readability and
understanding of the content. Note the following examples:

3 • Standard text: used for regular information.


• Boldface text: emphasizes a word or phrase.
• NOTE: sets apart special information or explains important instructions.
• The symbols below represent different risks or hazards:

Symbol Description

4 Warning/Caution
• WARNING: identifies situations or actions that may affect
patient or user safety. Disregarding a warning could result
in patient or user injury.
• CAUTION: points out special procedures or precautions
that personnel must follow to avoid equipment damage.

5 Caught Hazard Warning

Chemical Hazard Warning

Electric Shock Hazard Warning

7
Page 1 - 2 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Glossary of abbreviations
Chapter 1: Introduction

Glossary of abbreviations
Numerous abbreviations are used in relation to the AvantGuard® Electric Bed (see list of
1
abbreviations, table 1-1 page 1-3).
Table 1-1. List of abbreviations

Abbreviations Definition
AFS
AHS
ATS
Adjustable Foot Section
Adjustable Head Section
Adjustable Thigh Section
2
BS Brake Switch
CMFC Caregiver Mode Foot Control
Col-F Foot HL column
Col-H Head HL column
CP
CPR
Control Pendant
Head section “CPR” for cardio-pulmonary reanimation 3
CUFA Control Unit on a Flexible Arm
DMM Digital Multimeter
EOT End of Travel
FS Foot Section
g/y green/yellow
HL
HS
HiLow
Head Section
4
IVP IV Pole
LCU Lateral Caregiver Unit
LED Light-Emitting Diode
NC Normally closed

5
NO Normally open
P/N Part Number
PAT Portable Appliance Tester
PSU Power Supply Unit
RAP Repair and Analysis Procedure
RHS Retractable Head Section
S/A Subassembly
SS
T/RT
TS
Seat Section
Trendelenburg/Reverse Trendelenburg
Thigh Section
6
VAC Volts, Alternating Current
VDC Volts, Direct Current

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 3
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 Introduction
General description
The AvantGuard® electric bed includes:
• Three sections with adjustable incline: head, thigh and foot sections.
• Adjustment of the height of the sleep surface.

2 • Trendelenburg (head in the low position) and Reverse Trendelenburg (feet in the low
position) incline of the bed frame.
Hill-Rom's AvantGuard® electric bed is fitted with a dual control system. The following
functions can be used with mains power or a battery*:
• HiLow: raise/lower sleep surface
• Adjustable head section: raise/lower

3 • Adjustable thigh section: raise/lower


• Adjustable foot section*: raise/lower
• Comfort Trendelenburg/Reverse Trendelenburg
• “Shock”* position or emergency Reverse Trendelenburg
These functions are electrically controlled, except the basic foot section. Some of the functions
can be used by the patient (except the comfort T/RT and the “Shock” function) and the

4
caregivers from the control pendant, the control unit on a flexible arm, the lateral caregiver unit
(“Shock” function only) or the HL* pedal (HL only).
NOTE:
In order simplify the authoring process:
• Reverse Trendelenburg means comfort Reverse Trendelenburg
• Trendelenburg means comfort Trendelenburg

5
• T/RT means comfort T/RT

7
Page 1 - 4 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction
Figure 1-1. AvantGuard® Electric Bed
A C
D
1
P
E

O
F
2
N
G

H
3
L
K J I
2320_117
B
P C
Q

O D 4
Z
R

W
F
5
G
I
H
V
U E
Y
T
S 2320_112

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 5
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 Table 1-2. Identification of the functions of the AvantGuard® Electric Bed

Mark Description
A TotalGuard™ siderail unlock button
a

B TotalGuard™ integrated siderails


a

C Control unit on a flexible arm a

D Control pendant a

2 E MobiBar® egress handle a

F Vertically extractible footboard


G Built-in extension a

H Corner bumper
I Foot siderail support with T/RT and horizontal position
angle indicator a

J CPR handle

3 K
L
Caregiver mode control
Lateral caregiver unit (on each side)
M 150 mm diameter casters a

N “Shock”
O Extractible headboard
P Angle indicator of the head section a

Q Patient positioning indicator a

4 R
S
8 fastening points for restraining straps
Linen holder a
a

T Brake/steer control
U 5th wheel a

V HiLow pedal a

W 150 mm diameter double band casters a

5
X Accessory support bar b

Y IV pole support fitting at each corner


Z IV pole and patient helper fittings at each corner at the
head end
a. Function available according to bed model and country of use
b. Not shown

7
Page 1 - 6 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction
Bed positions

Figure 1-2. HiLow positions


1
Raised position

Lowered position

2320_120

5
Figure 1-3. EasyChair® position

2320_115

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 7
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 Figure 1-4. Reverse Trendelenburg

2
2320_116

3 Figure 1-5. Trendelenburg or “Shock” position

4
1787_128

5 Figure 1-6. EasyChair® and Reverse Trendelenburg position

7
2320_118

Page 1 - 8 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction
Precautions for use
WARNING:
1
Use of the bed's functions may result in serious bodily harm. The bed's functions must
only be used by correctly trained staff. The articulation functions of the bed can be
stopped by releasing the control, while pressing and holding the switch of the opposite
control or by disconnecting the power supply connector.

2
Before using the bed, read and understand the contents of the AvantGuard® Electric Bed User
Manual and of this manual. It is also important to understand and strictly apply all the safety
instructions in these manuals.
Always leave the bed in the lowered position and apply the brake when patients are left
unattended in order to prevent the patients from falling.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 9
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 Functions
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
Users of this equipment are potentially exposed to electric shocks. Always train staff of
the risks inherent in electrical equipment.

Figure 1-7. HiLow pedal*

2
H
G
Q 2320_124

3 Figure 1-8. Caregiver mode foot control*

4 Q

Figure 1-9. Control pendant with EasyChair®*


2320_129

I G E C A M L

5 H
B

6
K
O N P J 2320_122

7
Page 1 - 10 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction

I
Figure 1-10. Control pendant without EasyChair®*
G C A M L
1
B
H

P
2
N
D

K
3
2320_123

Table 1-3. Functions of the control pendant


Mark Description

4
A Raise head section with autocontour
B Lower head section with autocontour
C Raise thigh section
D Lower thigh section
E Raise foot section
F Lower foot section
G Raise HiLow (sleep surface)
H
I
Lower HiLow (sleep surface)
Indicator light showing that the bed is not fully lowered
5
J Set sleep surface to EasyChair position.
K Set sleep surface sections to flat position and lower bed to low
position.
L On/Off and power on light
M
N
O
Power ON light (battery or mains)
Place the sleep surface in the Trendelenburg position
Place the sleep surface in the Reverse Trendelenburg position
6
P Caregiver mode indicator light
Q Activate caregiver mode (under the pedal)*

NOTE:
All functions can be used by the caregiver. Patients can use functions A to H only.
7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 11
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 HiLow
The sleep surface of the AvantGuard® electric bed can be raised or lowered in order to position
the patient or when putting the patient in the bed or taking the patient out of the bed. The
column-based elevation system is also used to free space beneath the sleep surface. This
function can be used with the control pendant or the control unit on a flexible arm* (see figure
1-9 page 1-10) or the HiLow pedal* (see figure 1-7 page 1-10).
Press the Raise HiLow control to raise the sleep surface. Release when the required or maximum

2 height is reached.
Press the Lower HiLow control to lower the sleep surface. Release when the required or
minimum height is reached.
Detection of Bed not in low position
A light on the control pendant comes on as soon as the bed is no longer in the low position in
order to inform caregivers of the risks when the sleep surface is in the raised position (see User
Manual).

3 Retractable head section


The head section can be adjusted to the required angle up to the maximum value. This function
can be used with the control pendant or the control unit on a flexible arm (see figure 1-9 page
1-10).
When the Raise HS control is activated, three movements occur simultaneously: the HS is
raised, the HS moves rearwards and the corresponding hard surface is moved/extended on the

4
structure. These combined movements broaden the supporting surface, reduce hip pressure,
facilitate the patient's breathing by reducing abdominal pressure, limit the shearing forces and
provide stronger support for the head and neck.
Press the Raise HS control to raise the head section. Release when the required angle or
maximum elevation is reached.
Press the Lower HS control to lower the head section. Release when the required angle or the
low position is reached.

5 Angle indicator of the head section*


A head section angle indicator (see figure 1-1 page 1-5) is provided on each TotalGuard™*
head siderail. The label features marks approximately every 10° of incline of the head section
and is graduated from 0° to +90° in one direction for regular use and from 0 to 20° in the other
direction for use of the Trendelenburg function.

CPR
The AvantGuard® electric bed features a CPR function for the head section. The CPR control is
6 located in the middle section next to the LCU on both sides of the sleep surface (see figure 1-1
page 1-5). The handles built into the structure of the HS can be used to support the section when
the CPR function is used.
Using the head section CPR:
– Hold one side of the HS and pull on one of the yellow CPR handles.
– Pull and hold the CPR handle to control the downward movement.

7 Switching off the head section CPR:


– Release the CPR handle. The AHS function can be used as soon as the control is
activated (see figure 1-9 page 1-10).

Page 1 - 12 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction
Adjustable thigh section
The thigh section can be adjusted to the required angle up to the maximum value. This function 1
can be used with the control pendant or the control unit on a flexible arm (see figure 1-9 page
1-10).
Press the Raise TS control to raise the thigh section. Release when the required angle or
maximum elevation is reached.
Press the Lower TS control to lower the thigh section. Release when the required angle or the
low position is reached.

Adjustable foot section


2
The foot section can be adjusted to the required angle up to the maximum value electrically or
mechanically when the thigh section is at least at mid-height.
Electric adjustable foot section*
This function can be used with the control pendant or the control unit on a flexible arm* (see
figure 1-9 page 1-10).
To raise the foot section, press the Raise TS control until the thigh section is at least at mid- 3
height. Then press the Raise FS control. Release when the foot section reaches the required
angle and check that the thigh section is at least at mid-height. Press the Lower FS control.
Release when the required angle or the section is fully lowered.
Mechanical adjustable foot section*
This function is activated using the control handle located on the right-hand side of the foot
section.
To incline the foot section:
4
– Pull on handle located under the foot section (see figure 1-1 page 1-5).
– Raise or lower the foot section to the required angle.
– Release the handle.

Autocontour
Every AvantGuard® electric bed features a special function called the “autocontour”. This
function is used to automatically raise the thigh section of the bed to a given angle when the
5
head section is raised from its horizontal position, provided that the adjustable thigh section
function is not inhibited. This function prevents the patient from sliding towards the foot of the
bed when the head section is raised. This function can be used with the control pendant or the
control unit on a flexible arm (see figure 1-9 page 1-10).

6
Raise autocontour: the autocontour rises automatically when the Raise HS control is activated.
Lower autocontour: the autocontour lowers automatically when the Lower HS control is
activated. The thigh section is lowered once head section has reached the low position.
The autocontour function can be locked by inhibiting the ATS function using one of the LCUs.
If this function must be used subsequently, the ATS function must be enabled first (see figure 1-
9 page 1-10).

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 13
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 EasyChair®* function
The various electric functions of the sleep surface can be combined to automatically set the bed
to the "EasyChair" position. This function can be used with the control pendant or the control
unit on a flexible arm*.
Press the corresponding control to set the bed to the "EasyChair" position. Release the control
when the required angle or the maximum "EasyChair" position is reached.
To return from the "EasyChair" position to a flat sleep surface, press the Return to flat sleep

2 surface control on the control pendant or the control unit on a flexible arm. Release the control
when the required angle is reached or when the sections of the sleep surface are flat and the bed
is in the low position.

Lateral caregiver unit

Figure 1-11. Lateral caregiver unit with “Shock” function


G F E

3
A B C D 2320_125

4 Figure 1-12. Lateral caregiver unit without “Shock” function


F E

5 A B C D

Table 1-4. Characteristics of the lateral caregiver unit


2320_126

Mark Description
A Caregiver mode control
B Lock/unlock ATS/autocontour

6
C Lock/unlock AHS
D Lock/unlock HiLow
E Function lock indicator light
F Battery indicator (battery low)
G “Shock” function

The LCUs are located on either side of the middle section of the bed beneath the sleep surface.

7
The LCU is used to activate the caregiver mode (lock/unlock), to release the functions for use
by caregivers only (T/RT, EasyChair position, etc.) and to activate the Shock function. The LCU
also features a low battery charge indicator light (see figure 1-11 page 1-14). The CPR control is
independent of the LCU located nearby.

Page 1 - 14 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction
Caregiver mode
Functions can be enabled and inhibited as follows: 1
– Activate the Caregiver mode by pressing the key on the LCU (see figure 1-11 page
1-14) or by lifting the control paddle under the pedal (see figure 1-7 page 1-10) or
under the foot control (see figure 1-8 page 1-10) with the top of your foot.
– To lock an electric function, press the corresponding symbol. The corresponding light
comes on.
– To unlock an electric function, press the corresponding symbol. The corresponding
light goes off.
2
– Switch off the Caregiver mode by pressing the key (by pressing the control) or the
control paddle. The mode is automatically switched off after about 1 minute.
NOTE:
Automatic deactivation should not be considered as a standard function.
Trendelenburg/Reverse Trendelenburg
The sleep surface can be titled in two ways:
3
– Reverse Trendelenburg: the foot end is lowered.
– Trendelenburg: the head end is lowered
The maximum angle of T/RT movements is available at all initial heights of the sleep surface.
This function can be used with the control pendant or the control unit on a flexible arm, once it
has been unlocked on the LCU.
The bed is placed in the Trendelenburg or Reverse Trendelenburg position as follows: 4
– Switch on the Caregiver mode.
– Press and hold the Reverse Trendelenburg or Trendelenburg control as required.
Release the button when the sleep surface has reached the required angle or the
maximum angle.
– Switch off the Caregiver mode.
“Shock”* function*
5
This emergency function simultaneously sets the sleep surface to the flat position and the
Trendelenburg position. This function is activated using the LCU (see figure 1-11 page 1-14)
and is backed up in the event of a mains power failure.
The Shock function is activated as follows:
– Press and hold the Shock function control.
– The sleep surface is set to the Trendelenburg position with all sections flat.
– Release when the Shock position is reached.
6

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 15
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 Brakes
The AvantGuard® electric bed has a central braking system that is controlled by a single foot-
operated brake bar (see figure 1-1 page 1-5). Pressing the bar applies the brakes to all four
casters simultaneously.
NOTE:
The brake bar refers to both the brake bar and the steer bar.
To brake the bed, press on the brake bar with your foot so that it is inclined towards the ground.
2 To release the brake, raise the brake bar with your foot so that it is parallel with the ground. The
pedal remains slightly inclined downwards when released.

Standard steering
The AvantGuard® electric bed features a steering function for easier handling when moving the
bed or transferring a patient. The steering caster on the right-hand side at the head of the bed (as
seen by the patient) or on the left-hand side at the foot* of the bed can be locked in the

3 longitudinal axis of the bed by raising the brake bar. The bed can then be easily steered by
pushing on the headboard or the footboard (depending on the configuration).
To put the bed in the steering position, raise the brake bar with your foot so that it is inclined
upwards.
To remove the bed from the steering position, press on the brake bar with your foot so that it is
parallel with the ground. The pedal remains slightly inclined downwards when released.
NOTE:

4 The steering position is inoperative if the bed is fitted with a 5th wheel.

Headboard and footboard


The AvantGuard® electric bed is fitted with headboards and footboards. The boards can be
extracted vertically in order to move the bed and steer the bed using the handles. The boards are
also fitted with sleeves for quick installation on the supports on the cross members at the head
and the foot of the bed.
The boards can be extracted by pulling vertically in order to extract them from the holes at the
5 head and the foot of the bed.

Hard surfaces
To remove and install the SS, FS and TS hard surfaces, refer to procedure 4.3 page 4-5.
To remove and install the HS hard surfaces, refer to procedure 4.4 page 4-6.

Casters

6 The AvantGuard® electric bed is fitted with four swivelling casters mounted on the chassis at
the four corners of the bed.

Fastening points for restraining straps*


The AvantGuard® electric bed has eight fastening points for restraining straps. These points are
also used to position the SS, TS and FS hard surfaces.

Bumpers

7 Bumpers are located at each of the four corners of the bed frame.

Page 1 - 16 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction
IV pole and patient helper receptacles
The AvantGuard® electric bed has four receptacles for IV poles (accessories). The two 1
receptacles at the head end and the foot end can also be used to install a patient helper.

Available functions vary depending on bed model*


TotalGuard™* siderails
The AvantGuard® electric bed can be fitted with TotalGuard™ siderails on either side of the HS
and the FS. The FS has a special folding support located under the sleep surface. The foot
siderail can be detached if necessary. 2
Once the foot siderail is folded, each head siderail can be clicked into two secure raised
positions that can be adapted to different mattress widths and one low position. The head
siderails can be raised and lowered independently.
The siderails feature special openings used to stow and move the control pendant and an
indicator showing the angle of incline of the HS.
• To raise a head siderail (including when the foot siderail is folded):
– Pull the siderail outwards from the bed, while raising and turning to the innermost
3
position possible. The siderail is secure when it clicks into place.
• To lower a head siderail (including when the foot siderail is folded):
– Slightly push the siderail towards the centre of the bed with one hand, while pressing
the release button on the siderail with the other. Then lower the siderail by turning until
it is in the low position (see figure 1-1 page 1-5).
• To deploy a foot siderail (only when the head siderail is raised):
– Hold the mobile part of the foot siderail and turn towards the foot of the bed. Place in
4
the support provided. The siderail is secure when it clicks into place.
• To fold away a foot siderail:
– Hold the top of the foot siderail with one hand and press the release button on the
siderail support with the other. Raise the siderail and turn towards the head of the bed.

5
Position in the support provided on the head siderail.
Patient positioning indicator*
A triangle used to position the patient's hips can be found inside each TotalGuard™ head
siderail next to the articulations for the foot siderails (see figure 1-1 page 1-5).
Foot siderail supports*
• To raise a siderail support (see figure 1-1 page 1-5):
– Hold the support and tip upwards as far as possible. The support is secure when it
clicks into place.
• To lower a siderail support:
6
– Make sure that the corresponding foot siderail is folded. Hold the support with one
hand, while operating the release lever with the other. Then lower the support by
turning until it reaches the low position.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 17
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 T/RT angle indicators*


An incline angle indicator of the sleep surface can be found on either side of the bed on the foot
siderail support (see figure 1-1 page 1-5). The label has markings every 5° and is graduated
from 0° to 15° in both directions.
Long metal siderails*
The AvantGuard® electric bed can be fitted with long siderails on both sides of the bed. The
siderails can be retracted and removed as required.
2 These siderails are also used to stow and move the control unit on a flexible arm.
• To raise a siderail:
– Grip the siderail by the upper bar and raise. The siderail is secure when it clicks twice
into place.
• To lower a siderail:
– Grip the upper bar and push slightly the siderail to the head end, then press and hold the

3 first lock.
– Press the second lock and rotate the siderail downwards into the low position and then
release the lock.
HiLow pedal*
The AvantGuard® electric bed can be fitted with a bilateral HiLow pedal that caregivers can use
to raise or lower the sleep surface and to switch on the caregiver mode.

4
Caregiver mode foot control*
The AvantGuard® electric bed can be fitted with a control pedal used by caregivers to switch on
the caregiver mode.
Battery backup*
The AvantGuard® electric bed can be equipped with a backup battery so that the bed operates
normally when being moved or in the event of a mains power failure.

5
“Bed connected to mains, brake not applied” detection*
The brake must always be applied when the bed is connected to the mains power supply. If this
it not the case, an audible signal sounds. This safety feature prevents the power cable from being
pulled out of the socket when the bed is moved. The signal stops when the brake is applied or
when the power cable is unplugged from the mains socket.
MobiBar® egress handles*
The AvantGuard® electric bed can be fitted with egress handles that patients can use to get out

6
of the bed. The handles can be retracted so that they do not get in the way of caregivers when
not in use.
To use the egress handles, lift and turn the egress bar towards the head of the bed. The handle is
secure when it clicks into place.
To stow the egress handles, grip the handle and unlock it by pulling outwards away from the
bed. Turn the handle and place under the sleep surface.

7
Page 1 - 18 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction
5th wheel with controlled operation*
The 5th wheel system facilitates the movement of the AvantGuard® electric bed by providing a
central steering wheel under the chassis.
1
The wheel is activated and deactivated using the brake bar.
To lock the 5th wheel in the transfer position, raise the brake bar with your foot so that it is
inclined upwards. Point the bed in the direction of movement and move lengthways. The 5th
wheel automatically locks into position.
To release the 5th wheel from the transfer position and enable sideways movements, place the
brake bar in the horizontal position. The 5th wheel is automatically released. 2
Extension*
The extension of the AvantGuard® electric bed is designed for tall patients. The overall length
of the bed can be significantly increased by sliding the foot section along the guide rails. An
extension cushion , which is available as an accessory, can be used to extend the mattress when
the extension is deployed.
There are two possible positions (retracted/deployed).
To deploy the extension, lift the handle at the foot of the bed and pull on the extension. Check
3
that it clicks firmly into place.
To retract the extension, lift the same handle and push the extension. Check that it clicks firmly
into place.
Linen holder*
The AvantGuard® electric bed can be fitted with a linen holder that slides away under the FS.
Once deployed, the linen holder can be used to hold sheets and blankets when making the bed.
The safe working load is 15 kg.
4
To deploy the linen holder, pull on the tray under the footboard, then turn the metal stop towards
you.
To store the linen holder, repeat the above steps in reverse order.
Accessory support bar*
The AvantGuard® electric bed can be fitted with two accessory support bars (Hill-Rom
accessories, drainage bags, etc.) that are positioned under the sleep surface in the middle of the
5
bed. The bars slide towards the middle or the edge of the bed.
Medical device support bar*
The AvantGuard® electric bed can be fitted with two medical device support bars that are
positioned under the sleep surface in the middle of the bed. The position and movements are the

6
same as those of the accessory support bars.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 19
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Specifications
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 Specifications
Characteristics
See table 1-5 page 1-20 for the specifications of the AvantGuard® Electric Bed.
Table 1-5. Characteristics of the AvantGuard® electric bed

2 Characteristics
Bed length with extension deployed and plastic
Dimensions
±2,365 mm ±5 mm
endboards
Bed length without extension and plastic endboards ±2,185 mm ±5 mm
Bed length with extension deployed and wooden ±2,405 mm ±5 mm
endboards

3 Bed length without extension and wooden endboards


Min. width of TotalGuard™ siderails in raised position
a
±2,225 mm ±5 mm
1,000 mm
Max. width of TotalGuard™ siderails in raised position a
1,060 mm
Width of TotalGuard™ siderails in lowered position 970 mm
Width with long metal siderails 996 mm
Overall width with plastic endboards 990 mm

4 Overall width with Medispace™ endboards


Overall width with Sequoia endboards
1,045 mm
1,045 mm
Height of the sleep surface (in low position) ±400 mm±5 mm b e

depending on caster model. ±415 mm±5 mm c e

±393 mm±5 mm d e

Height of the sleep surface (in raised position) 800 mm 0/-10 mm


be

depending on caster model. 815 mm 0/-10 mm


ce

5 793 mm 0/-10 mm
de

Minimum space under the bed 150 mm ad

(bed with HiLow pedal) 163 mm bd

143 mm cd

Minimum space under the bed 187 mm ad

(bed without HiLow pedal) 200 mm bd

180 mm cd

6 Maximum head section angle


Thigh section angle: autocontour
+65°
20° ± 2°
Maximum thigh section angle +36° ± 2°
Maximum angle of electric foot section from horizontal - 23° ± 2°
If the thigh section is in the middle position -12.5° ± 2°
Maximum angle of power-driven foot section from -14° ± 2 °

7 horizontal
If the thigh section is in the middle position - 5.5° ± 2°

Page 1 - 20 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Specifications
Chapter 1: Introduction

Characteristics
Maximum angle of sleep surface from horizontal: T/RT
Dimensions
+16°/-16°
1
Maximum height of siderails above sleep surface 395 mm
Maximum weight of the bed (without mattress or 150 kg
accessories)
Safe working load 185 kg - 210 kg f

Maximum lifting load 250 kg


a. All bed versions can pass through doorways with a clearance greater than 1,050 mm when the siderails are
2
lowered.
b. Bed with 150 mm double band casters
c. Bed with 150 mm single band casters
d. Bed with 125 mm single band casters
e. Add 50 mm for a bed equipped with the “HiLow 45 to 85 cm” function.
f. If the total load (patient, mattress, and accessories) is between 185 kg and 210 kg, the
overload protection of the bed electronics may be activated. If the selected function is
overloaded, an alarm will sound and stop the selected movement. This overload
protection does not interfere with the CPR function.
3
Table 1-6. Environmental conditions for transport and storage

Condition Range
Temperature
Humidity
Between -10° and +50°C
20% to 80% at 30°C 4
Pressure 500 Hpa<P<1,060 Hpa
from 0 to 2,000 m

Table 1-7. Operating environment

Temperature
Condition Range
Between 0° and +40°C
5
Humidity 20% to 80% at 30°C
Pressure 700 hPa<P<1,060 hPa from
0 to 2,000m

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 21
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Specifications
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 Electric description
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
Users of this equipment are potentially exposed to electric shocks. Always train staff of
the risks inherent in electrical equipment.
The electric circuit is mechanically isolated from the metal parts of the bed.

Power supply
2 The AvantGuard® electric bed is fitted with electric actuators for the AHS, ATS, AFS* and HL
functions that are powered by a common power supply.
The PSU works at 230 V AC or 120 V AC* or 100 V AC* (tolerances: see table 3-4 page 3-12)
and can be equipped with a 24 V DC* backup battery. This battery can be used to operate the
bed's functions when the mains power supply is not available. A special alarm sounds when the
battery is low. This alarm sounds when the battery mode is selected and one of the bed's
functions is used. When the alarm sounds, remember to connect the bed to the mains power

3 supply in order to recharge the battery.


The AvantGuard® electric bed complies with the IEC standard 60601-2-38 and amendment 1
(for more details, refer to “Regulatory requirements” page 1-23). All beds are tested prior to
delivery and grounding and equalisation of potentials and current leaks are verified.

Control unit
Control pendant*

4 Functions can be controlled using the control pendant, which also provides operating
information. The control pendant operates at very low safety voltage and features all of the
buttons and indicator lights required to control the bed (except battery low). The control pendant
can be connected to the back of the LCU on the left-hand or right-hand side of the sleep surface
and can be easily stowed in the siderails. Two models are available, depending on the bed
model. Provided that the functions are not inhibited, they are available to caregivers and patients
(except T/RT, EasyChair® and CPR). Several functions can be used at the same time.

5 Control unit on a flexible arm*


The AvantGuard® electric bed may be equipped with a control unit on a flexible arm. This unit
performs the same functions as the control pendant on both sides and is also available in two
versions. It can be positioned on the right-hand or left-hand side of the head section. If the
control unit on a flexible arm is installed as an accessory, then it must be connected to the left-
hand LCU. The associated control pendant can only be connected to the right-hand LCU.

7
Page 1 - 22 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Specifications
Chapter 1: Introduction
Power-driven actuators
CAUTION:
1
The usage cycle of the actuators in intermittent use must not exceed 3 min/30 min.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
Three separate actuators are used for the AHS, ATS, AFS (1400 only) functions and two power-
driven columns operate the HL function. They are all designed to withstand the risks of ingress

2
of liquids under normal conditions of use. These power-driven actuators are powered by a
nominal voltage of 24 V DC and are equipped with a connector for easy disconnection in the
event of a problem.
All movements can only be made by pressing and holding the button of the corresponding
function. There are no automatic movements. Depending on the function, a button corresponds
to the movement of one or more motors.

Regulatory requirements

The AvantGuard® electric bed is NF MEDICAL “Hospital beds” compliant.


Authorisation N°: NF178-01/01 issued by:

AFNOR CERTIFICATION
4
11 rue Francis de Pressensé
95371 LA PLAINE SAINT DENIS CEDEX - France

The AvantGuard® electric bed complies with the following standards:


• NF-S-90-312 (1984),
• EN-60601-1 (1996),
• EN-60601-1-2 (2001),
5
• EN-60601-2-38 (1999),
• IEC-60601-2-38 Amendment 1 (1999).

The AvantGuard® electric bed complies with essential requirements of EC directive 93/42/EEC
applicable to class I medical equipment.

Meets the protection requirements of directive 89/336/EEC relating to Electromagnetic


6
Compatibility (ECM), group 1, class B.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 23
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Model Identification
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 Model Identification
For AvantGuard® Electric Bed model identification, see table 1-8 page 1-24.
Table 1-8. Model identification
Model number Name
LI158Bx AvantGuard® electric bed without the “EasyChair®”

2 LI158Bx
function (mechanical AFS)
AvantGuard® electric bed with the “EasyChair®”
function (electric AFS)

Safety Recommendations

3
CAUTION:
The usage cycle of the actuators in intermittent use must not exceed 3 min/30 min.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
CAUTION:
The AHS must always be flat when removing or installing the corresponding hard
surface. Disregarding this precaution may lead to incorrect positioning and cause the
sliding elevation system to malfunction.

4 CAUTION:
Always respect the polarity when installing the parts of the backup battery.
Disregarding this precaution may cause irreparable damage to the bed's power PCB.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the elastic on the new motors is not wound around the motor body
before removing it (cut). If necessary, turn the motor end rod in the appropriate

5 direction to unwind this elastic. It is used to indicate the correct position of the switches
and internal EOT stops of the motor. If they are incorrectly positioned, the motor or the
bed structure may be damaged.
CAUTION:
If the bed cannot be raised to mid-height for any reason, the arms of the elevation tool
must not reach the motors when they are positioned. Disregarding this precaution may
break the AHS and AFS motors.

6 CAUTION:
Check that the caster is correctly positioned with respect to the movements of the
hexagonal bar. Disregarding this precaution may cause the brake and steer system to
malfunction.

7
Page 1 - 24 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Safety Recommendations
Chapter 1: Introduction

CAUTION:
Double band caster: it is very important to stop turning the body of the caster when the
1
brakes are no longer applied. Otherwise, it cannot be adjusted. Failure to do so could
result in equipment damage.

CAUTION:
Always place the foot siderail in the folded position. Failure to do so could result in
equipment damage. 2
CAUGHT HAZARD WARNING :
The elevation tool must be used in order to remove the column in safety. Failure to do
so could result in injury.

CAUGHT HAZARD WARNING :


3
The bed frame must always be secured lengthways to keep it in the rail on the head
end HL column. Failure to do so could result in injury.

ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:


Users of this equipment are potentially exposed to electric shocks. Always train staff of
the risks inherent in electrical equipment.
4
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
An unusually strong current leak is indicative of internal damage to the PSU cable.
Users of the bed are at risk when the value of the current leak is greater than 500 micro
Amps.
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
The current flows through the connectors when the bed is switched on. Staff may be
injured if the bed is not disconnected from the power source.
5
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
The ground conductors, the grounding spring leaves and the grounding braids must be
correctly installed to establish the equipotential ground connection of the metal parts.
Technical staff and caregivers may be injured if this recommendation is not respected
and the installation is incorrect and/or continuity is not established.
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
6
Make sure that the elastic on the new motors is not wound around the motor body
before removing it (cut). If necessary, turn the motor end rod in the appropriate
direction to unwind this elastic. It is used to indicate the correct position of the switches
and internal EOT stops of the motor. If they are incorrectly positioned, the motor or the
bed structure may be damaged.
7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 25
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Safety Recommendations
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:


Always disconnect the bed before cleaning or servicing. Refer to the AvantGuard®
electric bed User Manual and to the chapters in this manual for additional precautions.
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
The current flows through the connectors when the bed is switched on. An electric
shock hazard exists when testing the bed when it is switched on. Do not touch any

2 wires or terminals with an electric potential. Failure to do so could result in patient injury
or equipment damage.
WARNING:
Use of the bed's functions may result in serious bodily harm. The bed's functions must
only be used by correctly trained staff. The articulation functions of the bed can be
stopped by releasing the control, while pressing and holding the switch of the opposite
control or by disconnecting the power supply connector.

3 WARNING:
This manual briefly describes the functions and use of the AvantGuard® Electric Bed. It
does not replace the User Manual, which describes these aspects in detail. Refer to the
User Manual for more detailed information about the use of the AvantGuard® electric
bed.

4 WARNING:
Always read the User Manual before using the AvantGuard® electric bed. Failure to do
so could result in equipment damage and/or injury.

WARNING:
Only the facility-authorized personnel can troubleshoot the AvantGuard® electric bed.
Failure to do so could result in patient injury or equipment damage.

5 WARNING:
The column must be replaced if it is faulty. The column must not be dismantled under
any circumstances. Failure to take this precaution may compromise the safety of staff
members.

WARNING:

6 Two persons are required to perform this operation. Failure to take this precaution
could result in equipment damage and/or injury.

WARNING:
Only the power supply cables included in Chapter 5 can be used with the AvantGuard®
Electric Bed. Using other cables may compromise the compliance and safety of the
bed.

7
Page 1 - 26 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Safety Recommendations
Chapter 1: Introduction

WARNING:
Do not raise the complete bed using the lifting tool. The maximum raised load is
1
150 kg. Disregarding this precaution may cause the lifting mechanism to break and
result in injury.

WARNING:

2
Do not remove the identification label from the bed. The information on the label is
essential in order to identify the bed and guarantee that maintenance operations can
be performed in safety. Failure to take this precaution could result in equipment
damage and/or injury.
WARNING:
Only the facility-authorized personnel can troubleshoot the AvantGuard® electric bed.
Failure to do so could result in patient injury or equipment damage.
WARNING:
Only use the accessories mentioned with the AvantGuard® electric bed. Use of other
accessories may compromise the safety of the AvantGuard® electric bed.
3
WARNING:
Consult the AvantGuard® electric bed User Manual before using the bed to prevent
any risk of injury to the patient or user.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 27
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Identification and caution labels
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 Identification and caution labels

Figure 1-13. Identification and caution labels

2 2320_106

3 2320_107

2320_114

4
2320_101

7
Page 1 - 28 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Identification and caution labels
Chapter 1: Introduction

2320_127 7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 1 - 29
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Identification and caution labels
Chapter 1: Introduction

1 NOTES:

7
Page 1 - 30 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008

Chapter 2
Troubleshooting procedures
Getting started
Start all of the procedures in this Chapter at step 1. Follow the indicated order. Each step
assumes that the preceding steps have been correctly completed. Each step corresponds to the
normal operation of the product. Please confirm by answering "Yes" or "No" to the question.
22
Your response will lead to another step in the procedure, a repair analysis procedure (RAP), or a
component replacement. If more than one component is listed, replace them in the given order.

To begin gathering information about the problem, start with the initial actions.

To isolate or identify a problem and to verify the repair after completing each corrective action
(replacing or adjusting a part, seating a connector, etc.), perform the function checks. 3
To verify the repair, perform the final actions after the function checks.

If the troubleshooting procedures do not isolate the problem, call your national Hill-Rom
Technical Support (see back cover) for assistance.
WARNING:
Only the facility-authorized personnel can troubleshoot the AvantGuard® Electric Bed.
Failure to do so could result in patient injury or equipment damage. 4
NOTE:
The purpose of the proposed troubleshooting method is to limit as much as possible the number
of spare parts required and costs when analysing the failure.
NOTE:

5
It is advisable to lock out the electrical functions that are not affected by the troubleshooting
before starting the analysis or to disconnect the bed if the failure does not affect an electrical
function. In the latter case, all functions should be locked out if the bed is fitted with a battery.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 1
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Initial actions
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 Initial actions
Use the initial actions to gather information from operators concerning problems with the
AvantGuard® Electric Bed. Note the symptoms and all other information concerning the
problem that the operator describes. This information helps identify the probable cause.

1. Someone who can explain the problem is available.

2
Yes No
↓ → See “Function Checks” page 2-4.

2. Ask this person to demonstrate or explain the problem.


The problem can be reproduced.
Yes No
↓ → See “Function Checks” page 2-4.

3 3. The problem is a result of improper operator action.


Yes

No
→ Refer to table 2-1 page 2-3, or go to “Function Checks” page 2-4.

4. Instruct the operator to refer to the procedures in the AvantGuard® Electric Bed User
Manual. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual to ensure proper operation
of the AvantGuard® Electric Bed.

4 Appendix
Refer to the following at the start of each RAP if necessary:
• table 1-1 page 1-3 for the meaning of the abbreviations used in this manual,
• figure 3-1 page 3-1 for the position of parts,
• figure 4-2 page 4-4 to see how to access the PSU,
• figure 4-12 page 4-14 and figure 4-13 page 4-14 to identify the connections.

7
Page 2 - 2 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Initial actions
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
Problem/Solution Table
If the problem can be easily identified, use the following tables to determine the appropriate
troubleshooting procedure.

Table 2-1. Problem/Solution Table

Problem Solution
“No functions work”
“Malfunction of the control unit function”
RAP 2.1
RAP 2.2
2
“Malfunction of lock-out mode” RAP 2.3
“Malfunction of the HiLow function” RAP 2.4
“Malfunction of the ATS” RAP 2.5
“Malfunction of the AHS (autocontour)” RAP 2.6
“Malfunction of the Caregiver mode”
“Backup battery mode malfunction”
RAP 2.7
RAP 2.8
3
“Malfunction of the AFS” RAP 2.9
“Malfunction of the power-driven AFS” RAP 2.10
“Malfunction of the EasyChair®” RAP 2.11
“Malfunction of the T/RT function” RAP 2.12
“The “Shock” function is inoperative when the bed is connected to the
mains”
RAP 2.13
4
“The “Shock” function is inoperative when the bed is not connected to RAP 2.14
the mains”
““Bed connected to AC power, brake not applied” Detection” RAP 2.15
“The CPR function is inoperative” RAP 2.16

5
“The foot siderail support lock/unlock mechanism is inoperative” RAP 2.17
“The head siderail lock/unlock mechanism is inoperative” RAP 2.18
“Faulty brakes” RAP 2.19
“Faulty steering” RAP 2.20
“Faulty steering with the controlled operation 5th wheel” RAP 2.21

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 3
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Function Checks
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 Function Checks
1. The initial actions have been performed.
Yes No
↓ → Refer to “Initial actions” page 2-2.

2. Apply the brake and place the siderails in the raised, folded position. Follow the instructions

2 below:
a. Disconnect the power cable from the wall socket.
b. Look for the causes of the problem, e.g., loose or damaged cables or connectors.
c. Connect the power cable to the wall socket.
d. Switch on the wall-mounted switch if necessary.

3
None of the lights on the CP or the CUFA is on.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 5.

3. Activate the “Shock” function, if present.


The function works.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.1.
4 4. Press the key on the lateral caregiver unit or under the HL pedal to switch to Caregiver
mode.
The green light on the CP or the CUDA comes on.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.7.

5 5. Unlock at least one bed movement (e.g., the AHS) by pressing the corresponding key.
The function light goes out.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.2.

6. Lock out all the functions by following the usual function lock-out sequence.
All the lights on the lateral caregiver unit come on when the corresponding keys are pressed.

6 Yes

No
→ Go to RAP 2.3.

7
Page 2 - 4 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Function Checks
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
7. Unlock all the functions by following the usual sequence.
All the lights on the lateral caregiver unit go out when the corresponding keys are pressed.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.3.

8. Check that your are still in Caregiver mode. The green light on the CP or the CUFA is on.
Press the Raise HL button and then the left and right control to raise the pedals.
The bed rises to the raised position without stopping and no audible alarms sound.
Yes No
2
↓ → Go to RAP 2.4.

9. Press the Lower HL button and then the left and right control to raise the pedals.
The bed descends to the lowered position without stopping and no audible alarms sound.
The “Bed in lowered position” light goes out when the bed reaches the very low position.
Yes

No
→ Go to RAP 2.4. 3
10. Press the Raise TS button.
The thigh section rises to the raised position without stopping and no audible alarms sound.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.5.

11. Press the Lower TS button.


The thigh section descends to the lowered position without stopping and no audible alarms
4
sound.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.5.

5
12. Press the Raise HS button.
The HS and TS rise simultaneously, then the TS stops at an angle approaching 17° while the
HS continues to rise to its highest position.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.6.

13. Press the Lower HS button.

6
The HS descends, then the TS starts descending in turn once the HS is in the lowered
position.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.6.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 5
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Function Checks
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 14. Bed with backup battery: Disconnect the mains power and test the functions that were
checked in steps 11 to 12.
The bed functions operate properly.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.8.

15. Bed with electric AFS: Press the Raise TS button until it reaches the fully raised position.

2 Then press the Raise FS button.


The foot section rises to the raised position without stopping and no audible alarms sound.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.9.

16. Bed with electric AFS: Then press the Lower FS button.
The foot section descends to the lowered position without stopping and no audible alarms

3 sound.
Yes

No
→ Go to RAP 2.9.

17. Bed with power-driven AFS: Actuate the control of the power actuator and lift the foot
section to the fully raised position. Release the handle.
The foot section rises freely and remains in the fully raised position.

4 Yes

No
→ Go to RAP 2.10.

18. Bed with power-driven AFS: Actuate the control of the power actuator and push the foot
section to the fully lowered position. Release the handle.
The foot section descends freely and remains locked in place when the handle is released.
Yes No

5
↓ → Go to RAP 2.10.

19. Returning the thigh section to the flat position. Bed with the “EasyChair” function: Press
the “EasyChair” button.
The HS and TS rise as long as the button is pressed until the required position is reached and
the FS descends once the TS has stopped at an angle approaching 17°.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.11.
6 20. Press the button to return to the flat position.
The HS, TS and FS gradually return to the flat position when the button is pressed and held
and the bed descends to the fully lowered position at the same time.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.11.

7
Page 2 - 6 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Function Checks
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
21. Activate the Raise HL until the bed reaches an intermediate position, then press the
Trendelenburg control of the sleep surface on the CP or the CUFA.
The sleep surface is freely and gradually inclined to the maximum Trendelenburg position
without making any unusual noises.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.12.

22. Activate the Reverse Trendelenburg control of the sleep surface on the CP or the CUFA.
The sleep surface is freely and gradually inclined to the maximum Reverse Trendelenburg 2
position without making any unusual noises.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.12.

23. Bed with the “Shock” function: With the bed still in the Reverse Trendelenburg position,

3
press the Raise HS button until it is fully raised. Actuate the “Shock” function using the two
lateral caregiver units one after the other. Complete the movement in stages.
The bed gradually moves to the Trendelenburg position, while the sections of the frame
move to the flat position.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.13.

24. Return the bed to the Reverse Trendelenburg position with the HS raised, then disconnect
the mains power plug. Actuate the “Shock” function again using one of the two lateral
caregiver units and complete the movement in a single stage. 4
The bed gradually moves to the Trendelenburg position, while the sections of the frame
move to the flat position.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.14.

25. Connect the mains plug. Bed with “Bed connected to mains, brakes not applied” detection.
Place the brake bar in the neutral position. 5
An audible alarm sounds.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.15.

26. Apply the brakes using the brake bar.


The audible alarm stops.
Yes No
6
↓ → Go to RAP 2.15.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 7
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Function Checks
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 27. Press the Raise HS button until the head section reaches the high position.
NOTE:
A person should be present on the bed in order to conduct a conclusive test.
Actuate the two CPR handles one after the other.
The AHS descends quickly to the mid-height position, then slows until the lowered position
is reached. The movement is smooth and produces no unusual noises.

2 Yes

No
→ Go to RAP 2.16.

28. Release the CPR handles and press the Raise HS button on the CP to check that the drive
mechanism of the AHS motor works correctly.
The HS rises smoothly without any abnormal noise.
Yes No

3
↓ → Go to RAP 2.16.

29. Deploy the foot siderails. Check that they lock firmly into place in the supports provided and
are released when the release control is actuated.
The lock/unlock system functions correctly.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.17.

4 30. Unlock the foot siderails and fold them away. Check that the head siderails are correctly
locked in place then actuate the release controls to lower them.
The siderails are correctly locked in place and descend smoothly without any unusual noise.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.18.

31. With the brakes still applied, attempt to move the bed.

5 The four casters are locked and prevent any movement.


Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.19.

32. Bed without the fifth wheel: Set the brake and steering bar to the steering position and lock
the steering caster in the longitudinal axis.
The steer caster locks into position.

6 Yes

No
→ Go to RAP 2.20.

33. Bed with the fifth wheel: Put the brake steering bar in the steering position and push the bed
lengthways to lock the fifth wheel in the direction of movement and move the bed, turning to
the left and then to the right as you do so.
The caster locks in position and remains locked in place when the bed is turned to the left

7
and right.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.21.

34. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

Page 2 - 8 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Final actions
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

Final actions
1. Perform the required preventive maintenance procedures. See “Preventive maintenance
checklist” page 6-13.

2. Complete all required administrative tasks.

Appendices
• A spare control pendant (QD2234A) is recommended. It is referred to as the test CP. It
must be connected to the rear of the LCU (see figure 4-6 page 4-9).
2
• An additional operational column with extension (AG0036) is recommended. This column
is used for test purposes.
• An additional LCU is recommended for test purposes.

3
• A new additional AHS motor is recommended for test purposes.
• A new additional ATS motor is recommended for test purposes.
• A new additional AFS motor is recommended for test purposes.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 9
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Final actions
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 2.1 No functions work


NOTE:
This RAP assumes that none of the functions can be actuated using the HL pedal, CP or CUFA.
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
Users of this equipment are potentially exposed to electric shocks. Always train staff of
the risks inherent in electrical equipment.

2 1. Checking the power cable.


The power cable is securely connected to the wall socket.
Yes No
↓ → Insert the plug and check that it is correctly positioned, then go to “Function
Checks” page 2-4.

2. Unplug the power cable from the wall socket and use a suitable tester to check that the
3 voltage is present in the wall socket.
The voltage is correct.
Yes No
↓ → Inform the customer of the problem with the mains power socket. Connect the bed
to a working power outlet, then go to “Function Checks” page 2-4.

3. Inspect the power cable for damage (crushing, cuts) on the lead up to the PSU input.

4 The cable appears to be in good condition.


Yes No
↓ → Replace the power cable (see procedure 4.7 page 4-12).

4. Place the HS in the raised position using the CPR control (two persons required).
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:

5
The current flows through the connectors when the bed is switched on. An electric
shock hazard exists when testing the bed when it is switched on. Do not touch any
wires or terminals with an electric potential.
a. Remove the cover of the PSU (see procedure 4.2 page 4-4).
b. Connect the plug in the wall socket.
c. Check that the mains voltage is present in the mains input connector (see figure 4-11
page 4-13) using a digital multimeter (DMM) (see figure 2-1 page 2-11).

6 The voltage is correct.


Yes No
↓ → Replace the power cable (see procedure 4.7 page 4-12).

5. Checking the remote control: connect the test CP (see “Appendices” page 2-9).
The functions are operational.

7
Page 2 - 10 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.1 No functions work
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
Yes

No
→ Replace the PSU (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14). If this solves the problem, perform
the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-Rom representative
11
(refer to the last page of this manual).

6. Go to RAP 2.2.

Figure 2-1. Measuring the mains input voltage

2320_200
4

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 11
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.2 Malfunction of the control unit function
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 2.2 Malfunction of the control unit function


NOTE:
At the start of this procedure, the control unit is connected to an LCU.
NOTE:
In this RAP, this LCU is referred to as “X”, while the LCU on the opposite side is referred to as
“Y”.
NOTE:
LCU refers to the lateral caregiver unit and its wiring, which cannot be dissociated (see list of
spare parts in Chapter 5).

1. At least one other function of the bed is operational (HL, Shock function, etc.).
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.1.

3 2. LCU circuit test (X). Connect the control unit to the other LCU (Y).
All of the functions of the control unit are operational and the lights come on.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 4.

3. Replace the LCU (X) (see procedure 4.10 page 4-18). If this solves the problem, perform the
“Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the

4 last page of this manual).

4. Test the control unit itself.


a. Disconnect the control unit(s) (pendant or on a flexible arm).
b. Connect the test CP (see “Appendices” page 2-9).
The functions of the control pendant are operational.
Yes No

5 ↓ → Go to step 6.

5. Replace the control pendant (see procedure 4.5 page 4-9) or the control unit on a flexible
arm (see procedure 4.6 page 4-10). If this solves the problem, perform the “Final actions”
page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-Rom representative
(refer to the last page of this manual).

6. Test for short circuit on LCU circuit (Y).

6 a. Remove the cover of the PSU (see procedure 4.2 page 4-4).
b. Disconnect the LCU (Y) (identify the wire by following it from the LCU to the
connector). Do not attempt to unplug the connector without unlocking it first.
The functions of the control pendant are operational.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 8.

7 7. Replace the LCU (Y) (see procedure 4.10 page 4-18).

8. Test for short circuit on LCU circuit (X).

Page 2 - 12 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.2 Malfunction of the control unit function
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
a. Re-connect the LCU (Y) .
b. Disconnect the LCU (X).
11
c. Connect the control pendant to the LCU (Y).
The functions of the control pendant are operational.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the PSU (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14). If this solves the problem, perform
the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-Rom representative
(refer to the last page of this manual). 2
9. Replace the LCU (X) (see procedure 4.10 page 4-18).
This solves the problem.
Yes No
↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

10. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.


3

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 13
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.3 Malfunction of lock-out mode
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 2.3 Malfunction of lock-out mode


NOTE:
At the start of this procedure, the control pendant is connected to an LCU. In this RAP, this LCU
is referred to as “X”, while the LCU on the opposite side is referred to as “Y”.
NOTE:
LCU refers to the lateral caregiver unit and its wiring, which cannot be dissociated (see list of
spare parts in Chapter 5).

1. Disconnect the CP(s) (see procedure 4.5 page 4-9) and the CUFA (see procedure 4.6 page
4-10).
The LCU (X) functions.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 4.

3 2. Re-connect a CP to the LCU (X).


The LCU (X) functions.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the CP (see procedure 4.5 page 4-9).

3. Re-connect a CUFA to the LCU (X).


The LCU (X) functions.

4 Yes

No
→ Replace the CUFA (see procedure 4.6 page 4-10).

4. Checking the connection of the LCU (X)


a. Remove the cover of the PSU (see procedure 4.2 page 4-4).
b. Check the connection of the LCU (X) with connectors N°1a or N°1b on the main PCB
(see figure 4-13 page 4-14).

5 The connection is correct.


Yes No
↓ → Re-connect and test.

5. Switch the connectors N°1a and N°1b (grey) on the main PCB (see figure 4-13 page 4-14).
The LCU (X) functions.

6
Yes No
↓ → Replace the LCU (X) (see procedure 4.10 page 4-18).

6. Check the LCU (Y) by performing steps 1 to 5.


The LCU (Y) functions.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the PSU (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14). If this solves the problem, perform
the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-Rom representative

7 (refer to the last page of this manual).

7. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

Page 2 - 14 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.4 Malfunction of the HiLow function
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
2.4 Malfunction of the HiLow function
1. At least one other function is operational.
11
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.1.

2. Identify the column(s) concerned.


Only one column does not function.
Yes

No
→ Go to step 5.
2
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
The current flows through the connectors when the bed is switched on. An electric
shock hazard exists when testing the bed when it is switched on. Do not touch any
wires or terminals with an electric potential. Doing so may result in injury.

3. Switch the connectors N°6 and N°4 (yellow) on the main PCB (see figure 4-13 page 4-14).
3
The faulty column functions again.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the faulty column: head column (see procedure 4.16 page 4-29) or foot
column (see procedure 4.17 page 4-32).

4. Replace the PSU (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14).

5. Proceed as follows to check the control(s).


4
a. Disconnect the control unit(s) (pendant or on a flexible arm).
b. Connect the test CP (see “Appendices” page 2-9).
The functions are operational.
Yes

No
→ Go to step 7. 5
6. Replace the control pendant (see procedure 4.5 page 4-9) or the control unit on a flexible
arm (see procedure 4.6 page 4-10).

7. The bed is fitted with the HL pedal option.


Yes No
↓ → Go to step 16.

8. Press the paddle located under the HL pedal.


6
The bed switches to Caregiver mode.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 11.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 15
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.4 Malfunction of the HiLow function
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 9. Only one pedal is faulty.


Yes No
↓ → Go to step 11.
10. Replace the faulty pedal (see procedure 4.18 page 4-37).
11. Right-hand pedal test.
Disconnect the right-hand pedal.
The bed switches to Caregiver mode using the left-hand pedal.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 13.
12. Replace the right-hand pedal (see procedure 4.18 page 4-37).
13. Left-hand pedal test.

3
Re-connect the right-hand pedal and disconnect the left-hand pedal.
The bed switches to Caregiver mode using the right-hand pedal.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 15.
14. Replace the left-hand pedal (see procedure 4.18 page 4-37).
15. Disconnect both pedals.

4 The bed switches to Caregiver mode using the LCU.


Yes

No
→ Go to RAP 2.3.
16. Finding faults with the PSU or columns.
a. Remove the cover of the PSU (see procedure 4.2 page 4-4).
b. Connect the test column (operational) to connector N°6 then N°4 on the main PCB (see

5 figure 4-13 page 4-14).


The control activates the test column.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the PSU (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14).
17. Replace the two HiLow columns: head column (see procedure 4.16 page 4-29) and foot
column (see procedure 4.17 page 4-32).

6 This solves the problem.


Yes

No
→ Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).
18. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
Page 2 - 16 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.5 Malfunction of the ATS
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
2.5 Malfunction of the ATS
NOTE:
11
Initial conditions: The electric AFS is operational (if present) (see “Function Checks” page
2-4).

1. At least one other function is operational.


Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.1.

2. Checking the control unit.


2
a. Disconnect the control unit(s) (pendant or on a flexible arm).
b. Connect the test CP (see “Appendices” page 2-9).
The functions are operational.

3
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 4.

3. Replace the CP (see procedure 4.5 page 4-9) or the CUFA (see procedure 4.6 page 4-10).

4. Finding faults with the ATS motor:


a. Remove the cover of the PSU (see procedure 4.2 page 4-4).
b. Switch over the ATS and AFS motor connectors (N°5 brown & N°2 green) or connect
the new ATS motor (if available) to the AFS connector N°2 (green).
c. Press the Raise AFS then the Lower AFS buttons.
4
The ATS function is operational. The motor shaft moves in and out correctly.
Yes No
↓ → The ATS motor is faulty. Replace it (see procedure 4.14 page 4-25). If this solves
the problem, perform the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national

5
Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

5. The PSU is faulty. Replace it (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14).


This solves the problem.
Yes No
↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

6. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 17
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.6 Malfunction of the AHS (autocontour)
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 2.6 Malfunction of the AHS (autocontour)


Initial conditions: The ATS function is operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4-4).
NOTE:
The TS does not descend when the Lower HS button is pressed once. To lower it again, first
reset the function by raising the HS.

1. At least one other function is operational.


Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.1.

2. Checking the remote control:


a. Disconnect the control unit(s) (pendant or on a flexible arm).
b. Connect the test CP (see “Appendices” page 2-9).

3
The functions are operational.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 4.

3. Replace the CP (see procedure 4.5 page 4-9) or the CUFA (see procedure 4.6 page 4-10).

4. Press the Raise TS button.


The TS rises.

4 Yes

No
→ Go to step 7.

5. In case of doubt between the PSU and misuse:


a. Press the Raise HS button until the head section reaches the raised position.
b. Press the Lower HS button.

5
The HS descends.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the PSU (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14).

6. The problem is due to misuse (see Note).

7. Troubleshooting method with two possibilities:


a. You have a new motor: Go to step 8.

6 b. You do NOT have a new motor: Go to step 12.


8. Troubleshooting with a new motor:
In case of doubt between the PSU and the ATS motor with the switch closed.
a. Replace the ATS motor with a new motor in the retracted position and connected to red
connector n°5.

7
b. Then press the Raise HS button.
The TS rises.

Page 2 - 18 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.6 Malfunction of the AHS (autocontour)
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
Yes

No
→ Go to step 10. 11
9. Replace the ATS motor (see procedure 4.14 page 4-25).

10. In case of doubt between the PSU and the ATS motor with the switch open.
a. New motor with shaft in extended position.
b. Then press the Raise HS button (A).
The TS rises. 2
Yes No
↓ → Replace the ATS motor (see procedure 4.14 page 4-25).

11. Replace the PSU (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14).

12. Troubleshooting without a new motor (only possible with electric ATS):
a. Press the Raise HS button until it reaches the raised position.
b. Press the Lower TS button and the Lower FS button until both sections reach the
3
lowered position.
c. Press the Raise HS button.
The TS rises to mid-height and stops.

4
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 14.

13. The problem is due to misuse.

14. Inverting the ATS and AFS motor connectors:


Invert the connectors of the ATS and AFS actuators (green N°2 et brown N°5)
a. Press the Raise FS button: the ATS motor shaft is fully extended.
b. Press the Lower TS button: the AFS motor shaft is fully retracted.
c. Press the Raise HS button.
5
The AFS motor starts and the shaft stops moving after about 15 mm.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the PSU (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14). If this solves the problem, perform
the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-Rom representative
(refer to the last page of this manual).

15. Replace the ATS motor (see procedure 4.14 page 4-25).
6
This solves the problem.
Yes No
↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

16. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.


7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 19
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.7 Malfunction of the Caregiver mode
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 2.7 Malfunction of the Caregiver mode


NOTE:
In this RAP, the LCU, the HL pedal or the ECP is referred to as “X”, while the LCU on the
opposite side is referred to as “Y”.
Initial conditions: All bed movements function normally using the patient keyboard (blue
section).

1. Checking the caregiver control pendant*.


Disconnect the caregiver control pendant from the LCU. Connect the test CP (P/N AG0161,
see “Appendices” page 2-9). The Caregiver mode light comes on when the Caregiver mode
key on the LCU is pressed.
The caregiver functions work normally.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 3.
3 2. Replace the caregiver CP (see procedure 4.5 page 4-9).

3. Checking the caregiver keyboard on a flexible arm.


Raise the head section to its maximum height. Remove the central sleep surfaces. Unclip the
plastic cover on the central metal duct to access the circuit box. Disconnect the control unit
on a flexible arm from the circuit box. Connect the test CP (P/N AG0061, see appendix,

4
page 2-12). The Caregiver mode light comes on when the Caregiver mode key on the LCU
is pressed.
The caregiver functions work normally.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 5.

4. Replace the CUFA (see procedure 4.6 page 4-10).

5 5. Check the circuit included with the flexible arm.


Remove the cover of the PSU (see procedure 4.2 page 4-4). Disconnect the LCU from the
circuit box and the PSU circuit box. Connect the LCU directly to connector N°1a or N°1b on
the PSU in the place of the circuit box (see figure 4-13 page 4-14).
The Caregiver mode light comes on when the Caregiver mode key on the LCU is pressed.
The caregiver functions work normally.

6 Yes

No
→ Go to step 7.

6. Replace the circuit box (see procedure 4.11 page 4-20).

7. Checking the lateral caregiver unit (X).


Remove the cover of the PSU (see procedure 4.2 page 4-4).
a. Disconnect the LCU (X).
7 b. Press the Caregiver mode key on the LCU (Y).
The Caregiver mode light comes on when the Caregiver mode key on the LCU is pressed.

Page 2 - 20 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.7 Malfunction of the Caregiver mode
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
The caregiver functions work normally.
Yes No
11
↓ → Go to step 9.

8. Replace the LCU (X) (see procedure 4.10 page 4-18).

9. Checking the lateral caregiver unit (Y).

2
a. Disconnect the LCU (Y) from the PSU or the circuit box (in the duct).
b. Press the Caregiver mode key on the LCU (X).
The Caregiver mode light comes on when the Caregiver mode key on the LCU is pressed.
The caregiver functions work normally.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 11.

10. Replace the LCU (Y) (see procedure 4.10 page 4-18).

11. Checking the paddle (X) under the HL pedal* or ECP*.


3
Remove the protective cover on the foot column. Remove the two clipped plastic caps.
Disconnect the mains power cable of pedal (X). The Caregiver mode light comes on when
the Caregiver mode key on the LCU is pressed.
The caregiver functions work normally.
Yes

No
→ Go to step 13. 4
12. Replace the HL pedal or ECP (see procedure 4.18 page 4-37).

13. Checking the paddle (Y) under the HL pedal* or ECP*.


Disconnect the mains power cable of pedal (Y). The Caregiver mode light comes on when

5
the Caregiver mode key on the LCU is pressed.
The caregiver functions work normally.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the PSU (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14). If this solves the problem, perform
the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-Rom representative
(refer to the last page of this manual).

14. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

15. Replace the HL pedal or ECP (Y) (see procedure 4.18 page 4-37). 6
This solves the problem.
Yes No
↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

16. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 21
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.8 Backup battery mode malfunction
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 2.8 Backup battery mode malfunction


Initial conditions: The bed functions normally when connected to the mains (see “Function
Checks” page 2-4).

1. Checking the control unit.


a. Disconnect the control unit(s) (pendant or on a flexible arm).
b. Connect the test CP (see “Appendices” page 2-9).
The functions of the control unit are operational.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 3.

2. Replace the control pendant (CP) (see procedure 4.5 page 4-9) or the control unit on a
flexible arm (see procedure 4.6 page 4-10).

3 3. Checking the battery kit connections (see figure 4-14 page 4-16) :
Remove the cover of the PSU (see procedure 4.2 page 4-4).
The battery kit is connected properly.
Yes No
↓ → Connect the battery kit correctly and go to “Function Checks” page 2-4.

4. Battery charge problem:

4 Plug the bed into the mains power supply and make sure that it remains connected for at
least 12 hours without the batteries being used. Then disconnect the bed.
The bed operates correctly on the backup batteries after charging.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 6.

5. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

5 6. Checking the backup battery kit:


Replace the battery kit with a new battery kit.
The bed functions with the new backup battery kit.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the PSU (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14). If this solves the problem, perform
the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-Rom representative

6 (refer to the last page of this manual).

7. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
Page 2 - 22 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.9 Malfunction of the AFS
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
2.9 Malfunction of the AFS
Initial conditions: ATS motor: The movements function (retraction and extension) and the
11
motor shaft is extended.

1. At least one other function is operational.


Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.1.

2. Checking the remote control:


a. Disconnect the control unit(s) (pendant or on a flexible arm).
2
b. Connect the test CP (see “Appendices” page 2-9).

3. The functions are operational.


Yes No

3
↓ → Go to step 5.

4. Replace the CP (see procedure 4.5 page 4-9) or the control unit on a flexible arm (see
procedure 4.6 page 4-10).

5. When in doubt about the AFS motor intermediate switch.


The problem only occurs with the EasyChair and ATS functions.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 7.

6. Go to step 11.
4
7. Inverting the motors:
a. Remove the cover of the PSU.
b. Invert the ATS and AFS motor connectors (N° 5 brown/N° 2 green) on the main PCB
(see figure 4-13 page 4-14).
c. Press the button to return to the flat position.
The AFS function is operational: the ATS motor shaft extends halfway.
5
Yes No
↓ → The AFS motor is faulty. Replace it (see procedure 4.15 page 4-27).

8. When in doubt about the ATS motor intermediate switch.


a. Connect the AFS motor cable to the green N°2 connector.
b. Either connect a new ATS motor in the extended position
– or, check the ATS motor intermediate switch using an ohmmeter: when the motor shaft
6
is extended, contacts 3 and 4 of the 4-pin connector (brown N°5 connector) must be by-
passed (see figure 2-2 page 2-23) and when the shaft is retracted, the circuit must be
open.
Figure 2-2. 4-pin connector

7
3 4

1 2 2320_202

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 23


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.9 Malfunction of the AFS
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 9. The ATS function is operational.


Yes No
↓ → The PSU is faulty. Replace it (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14). If this solves the
problem, perform the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-
Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).
10. The ATS motor is faulty. Replace it (see procedure 4.14 page 4-25), then perform the “Final
actions” page 2-9.
11. When in doubt about the AFS motor intermediate switch:
Check the AFS motor intermediate switch using an ohmmeter:
• When the shaft is extended, contacts 3 and 4 (see figure 2-2 page 2-23) of the connector
(green N°2 connector) must be by-passed.
• When the shaft is retracted, the circuit must be open.
The AFS motor intermediate switch is operational.
3 Yes

No
→ The AFS motor is faulty. Replace it (see procedure 4.15 page 4-27). If this solves
the problem, perform the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national
Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

12. The PSU is faulty. Replace it (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14).
This solves the problem.

4 Yes

No
→ Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).
13. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
Page 2 - 24 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.10 Malfunction of the power-driven AFS
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
2.10 Malfunction of the power-driven AFS
Initial conditions: The ATS function is operational.
11
1. Check the attachments of the ATS and AFS. Remove the TS and FS hard surfaces. Check
that the screws, bolts or pins are not damaged, loose or missing from the control handle or
the AFS motor mechanism (refer to the assembly diagrams in Chapter 5).
No bolts, screws or pins are missing or damaged.
Yes

No
→ Replace the missing or damaged parts, and then go to “Function Checks” page
2-4.
2
2. Checking the AFS motor settings:
a. Press the Raise TS button until it reaches the raised position.
b. Raise the TS to the high position.
c. Check that the motor start-up settings are correct (see procedure 4.24 page 4-53).
The settings are correct.
3
Yes No
↓ → Adjust the actuator settings (see procedure 4.24 page 4-53), then go to “Final
actions” page 2-9.

3. Foot actuator test:


Yes

No
→ Replace the foot gas-powered actuator and cable subassembly and the release
4
handle (see procedure 4.24 page 4-53), then go to step 5.

4. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.


This solves the problem.
Yes No
↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

5. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.


5

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 25
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.11 Malfunction of the EasyChair®
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 2.11 Malfunction of the EasyChair®


Initial conditions:
a. The ATS function is operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4).
b. The AFS function is operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4).
c. The AHS function (autocontour) is operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4).
d. The Caregiver mode is active: the Caregiver mode light on the caregiver control unit or
the control arm is on.

1. At least one other function is operational.


Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.1.

2. Checking the control unit:

3 a. Disconnect the control unit(s) (pendant or on a flexible arm).


b. Connect the test CP (see “Appendices” page 2-9).

3. The functions are operational.


Yes No
↓ → The PSU is faulty. Replace it (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14). If this solves the
problem, perform the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-

4
Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

4. Replace the CP (see procedure 4.5 page 4-9) or the CUFA (see procedure 4.6 page 4-10).
This solves the problem.
Yes No
↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

5. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
Page 2 - 26 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.12 Malfunction of the T/RT function
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
2.12 Malfunction of the T/RT function
Initial conditions:
11
a. The HL function is operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4).
b. The Caregiver mode mode is active: the Caregiver mode light on the caregiver control
unit or the control arm is on.

1. At least one other function is operational.


Yes

No
→ Go to RAP 2.1.
2
2. Checking the control unit:
a. Disconnect the control unit(s) (pendant or on a flexible arm).
b. Connect the test CP (see “Appendices” page 2-9).
The T/RT function is operational.
Yes

No
→ The PSU is faulty. Replace it (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14). If this solves the
3
problem, perform the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-
Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

3. Replace the CP (see procedure 4.5 page 4-9) or the CUFA (see procedure 4.6 page 4-10).

4
This solves the problem.
Yes No
↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

4. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 27
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.13 The “Shock” function is inoperative when the bed is connected to the mains
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 2.13 The “Shock” function is inoperative when the bed is connected to


the mains
Initial conditions:
a. The T/RT function is operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4).
b. The EasyChair® function is operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4).
1. At least one other function is operational.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.1.

2. Inversion on the LCUs:


Try to use the “Shock” function with the other LCU.
The “Shock” function is operational.

3
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 5.

3. Remove the cover of the PSU (see procedure 4.2 page 4-4).
a. Inver the two LCUs.
b. Switch on the “Shock” function.
The “Shock” function is operational.

4 Yes

No
→ Replace the PSU (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14).

4. Replace the LCU (see procedure 4.10 page 4-18).

5. Disconnect the two LCUs (grey connectors 1a and 1b),


– Connect a new LCU and switch on the “Shock” function.

5
The “Shock” function is operational.
Yes No
↓ → The PSU is faulty. Replace it (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14). If this solves the
problem, perform the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-
Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).
6. Replace the faulty LCU (see procedure 4.10 page 4-18).
This solves the problem.

6 Yes

No
→ Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

7. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
Page 2 - 28 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.14 The “Shock” function is inoperative when the bed is not connected to the mains
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
2.14 The “Shock” function is inoperative when the bed is not connected
to the mains 11
Initial conditions:
a. The T/RT function is operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4).
b. The EasyChair® function is operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4).
c. The “Shock” function is operational when the bed is connected to the mains (see
“Function Checks” page 2-4).

1. Checking the configuration of the bed.


2
The bed is equipped with the backup battery function.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 8.

2. Test the functions in backup battery mode. Disconnect the power cable from the mains and
switch on the various unlocked functions.
The functions are operational when the bed is not connected to the mains.
3
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.13.

3. Remove the cover of the PSU (see procedure 4.2 page 4-4). Check the connections of the
“Shock” battery kits and the backup battery (see figure 4-14 page 4-16).
The connections are OK.
Yes No
4
↓ → Connect the battery kits correctly and perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4.

4. Battery charge problem. Plug the bed into the mains power supply and make sure that it
remains connected for at least 12 hours without the batteries being used. Then disconnect the
bed. Switch on the “Shock” function.
The “Shock” function is operational after charging the battery.
Yes No
5
↓ → Go to step 6.

5. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

6. Replace the “Shock” function battery kit with a new kit (see procedure 4.9 page 4-16).
The “Shock” function is operational.
Yes

No
→ The PSU is faulty. Replace it (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14). If this solves the
6
problem, perform the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-
Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

7. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 29
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.14 The “Shock” function is inoperative when the bed is not connected to the mains
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 8. “Shock” function WITHOUT backup battery:


a. Remove the cover of the PSU (see procedure 4.2 page 4-4).
b. Check the connections of the “Shock” battery kits (see figure 4-14 page 4-16).
The “Shock” function battery kit is connected correctly (see figure 4-14 page 4-16).
Yes No
↓ → Connect the battery kits correctly and go to “Function Checks” page 2-4.

9. Battery charge problem:


a. Plug the bed into the mains power supply and make sure that it remains connected for
at least 12 hours without the batteries being used. Then disconnect the bed.
b. Switch on the “Shock” function.
The “Shock” function is operational after charging the battery.

3
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 11.

10. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

11. Checking the batteries:


a. Replace the “Shock” function battery kit with a new kit (see procedure 4.9 page 4-16).
b. Switch on the “Shock” function.

4 The “Shock” function is operational.


Yes No
↓ → The PSU is faulty. Replace it (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14). If this solves the
problem, perform the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-
Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

12. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
Page 2 - 30 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.15 “Bed connected to AC power, brake not applied” Detection
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
2.15 “Bed connected to AC power, brake not applied” Detection
Initial conditions: The HL function is operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4).
11
1. At least one other function is operational.
Yes No
↓ → Go to RAP 2.1.

2
2. Checking the brake/column detection switch connection:
a. Remove the foot cover.
b. Check that the brake connector is properly connected to the foot column connector
under the cable shield (see figure 4-28 page 4-33).
“Bed connected to AC power, brake not applied” detection function is operational.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 4.

3. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4. 3


4. Checking the switch:
a. Disconnect the 2-pin connector at the bottom of the foot column.
b. Using the ohms function of a DMM, check that the switch is in good working order at
the terminals of the brake wiring connector:
– At rest (brakes not applied): circuit closed,
– Active (brakes applied): circuit open.
4
The switch functions correctly.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the switch and brake detection wiring subassembly (see procedure 4.19
page 4-38), then go to “Final actions” page 2-9).

5. Checking the foot column wiring:


a. Connect the 2-pin connector at the bottom of the foot column.
5
b. Disconnect the foot HL column extension connector in the central rail of the bed frame
(see figure 4-28 page 4-33).
c. Proceed with the same check on the terminals of the 8-pin connector in the central rail
of the bed frame, checking that the switch is in good working order on terminals 1 and
6 of the foot HL column connector (see figure 2-3 page 2-31).

Figure 2-3. 8-pin connector


6
5 8

1 4 7
2320_201

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 31


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.15 “Bed connected to AC power, brake not applied” Detection
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 The continuity of the column wiring and switch is OK.


Yes No
↓ → Replace the foot HL column (see procedure 4.17 page 4-32), then go to “Final
actions” page 2-9.

6. Checking the foot column extension:


a. Remove the cover of the PSU (see procedure 4.2 page 4-4).
b. Disconnect the blue 8-pin connector N°3 on the main PCB (see figure 4-13 page 4-14).
c. Proceed with the same check on the terminals of the blue 8-pin connector N°3 on the
PSU, checking that the switch is in good working order on terminals 1 and 6 (see figure
2-3 page 2-31) of the foot HL column extension connector.
The continuity of the extension, column wiring and switch is OK.
Yes No

3
↓ → Replace the foot HL column and extension subassembly (see procedure 4.17 page
4-32). If this solves the problem, perform the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise
call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

7. Replace the PSU (see procedure 4.8 page 4-14).


This solves the problem.
Yes No
↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).
4 8. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
Page 2 - 32 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.16 The CPR function is inoperative
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
2.16 The CPR function is inoperative
Initial conditions: The HL function is operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4).
11
1. Checking the mechanical condition of the CPR system. Remove the hard surfaces of the
seat, thigh and foot sections (see procedure 4.3 page 4-5). Check that the screws and pins on
the release handles or the adjustable head section motor release mechanism are not damaged
or missing (refer to the exploded view in Chapter 5).
No screws or pins are missing or damaged.
Yes

No
→ Replace the missing or damaged parts, and then go to “Function Checks” page
2
2-4.

2. Check that the release cable is not broken.


The cable is intact.
Yes

No
→ Go to step 4. 3
3. Check that the adjustment of the release cable is correct (see procedure 4.13 page 4-22).
The settings are correct.
Yes No
↓ → Adjust the release cable (see procedure 4.13 page 4-22).

4. Replace the AHS motor and release cable subassembly (see procedure 4.12 page 4-21) and
(see procedure 4.13 page 4-22). 4
This solves the problem.
Yes No
↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

5. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 33
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.17 The foot siderail support lock/unlock mechanism is inoperative
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 2.17 The foot siderail support lock/unlock mechanism is inoperative


Initial conditions: The HL function is operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4).

1. Checking the foot siderail support:


a. Remove the TS and FS hard surfaces.
b. Check that no screws, pins or circlips are missing or damaged on the foot siderail
support mechanism.
No screws or pins are missing or damaged.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the missing screws, pins or circlips (see the corresponding view in
Chapter 5), then go to “Function Checks” page 2-4.

2. Checking the locking mechanism: Check that the foot siderail locks and unlocks correctly.

3
The lock/unlock mechanism functions correctly.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the foot siderail support (see procedure 4.28 page 4-59), then go to
“Function Checks” page 2-4.

3. The problem is solved.


Yes No
↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

4 4. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
Page 2 - 34 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.18 The head siderail lock/unlock mechanism is inoperative
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
2.18 The head siderail lock/unlock mechanism is inoperative
Initial conditions: The foot siderails are operational (see “Function Checks” page 2-4).
11
1. Checking the head siderail lock/unlock mechanism:
Place the foot siderail in the folded position. Check that no screws, pins or circlips are
missing or damaged on the locking mechanism (see the corresponding view in Chapter 5).
No screws, pins or circlips are missing or damaged.
Yes

No
→ Replace the missing parts (see the corresponding view in Chapter 5), then go to
2
“Function Checks” page 2-4.

2. Checking the locking mechanism:


Check that the siderail locks and unlocks correctly.

3
The lock/unlock mechanism functions correctly.
Yes No
↓ → Replace the head siderail and elevation arm subassembly (see procedure 4.25 page
4-55).

3. The problem is solved.


Yes No
↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

4. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9. 4

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 35
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.19 Faulty brakes
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 2.19 Faulty brakes


1. Check that the casters are securely fastened. Check that the screws or supports are not
damaged, loose or missing from the caster attachments (refer to the assembly diagrams in
Chapter 5).
A screw or pin in missing or damaged.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 3.

2. Replace the missing parts (see the corresponding view in Chapter 5), then go to “Function
Checks” page 2-4.

3. Checking the brake pedal. Set the brake/steer pedal to the brake position, and then check that
the four casters are locked by trying to move the bed.
The braking is correct.

3 Yes

No
→ Adjust the caster(s) (see procedure 4.21 page 4-43), then go to “Final actions”
page 2-9.

4. The problem is solved.


Yes No
↓ → Replace the faulty caster(s) (see procedure 4.21 page 4-43). If this solves the

4
problem, perform the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-
Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

5. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
Page 2 - 36 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.20 Faulty steering
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures
2.20 Faulty steering
1. Check that the casters are securely fastened. Set the brake/steer pedal to the brake position.
11
Check that the screws or supports are not damaged, loose or missing from the caster
attachments (refer to the assembly diagrams in Chapter 5).
A screw or pin in missing or damaged.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 3.

2. Replace the missing parts (see the corresponding view in Chapter 5), then go to “Function
2
Checks” page 2-4.

3. Checking the steering. Set the brake/steer pedal to the steer position, push the bed
lengthways and check that the right-hand caster at the head end locks in the lengthways
direction of the bed.
The caster locks in the lengthways direction.
Yes No
3
↓ → Replace the caster (see procedure 4.21 page 4-43). If this solves the problem,
perform the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-Rom
representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

4. The problem is solved.

4
Yes No
↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).

5. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 2 - 37
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
2.21 Faulty steering with the controlled operation 5th wheel
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting procedures

1 2.21 Faulty steering with the controlled operation 5th wheel


1. Check that the 5th wheel is properly attached. Check that the screws or pins are not
damaged, loose or missing from the 5th wheel support and caster attachments (refer to the
assembly diagrams in Chapter 5).
A screw or pin in missing or damaged.
Yes No
↓ → Go to step 3.

2. Replace the missing or damaged parts, and then go to “Function Checks” page 2-4.

3. Check that the 5th wheel locks correctly. Set the brake/steer pedal to the steer position, push
the bed lengthways and check that the 5th wheel locks in the lengthways direction of the
bed.
The articulated arm locks in the lengthways direction.

3 Yes

No
→ Go to step 5.

4. Check that the 5th wheel locks correctly. Place the brake/steer pedal in the neutral position.
Apply a sideways effort to the bed and check that the articulated arm securing the 5th wheel
is released.
The articulated arm is released correctly.

4 Yes

No
→ Adjust the release cable (see procedure 4.22 page 4-48). If this solves the problem,
perform the “Final actions” page 2-9, otherwise call your national Hill-Rom
representative (refer to the last page of this manual).
5. Replace the support and caster assembly (see procedure 4.21 page 4-43).
The problem is solved.
Yes No

5 ↓ → Call your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of this manual).
6. Perform the “Final actions” page 2-9.

7
Page 2 - 38 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008

Chapter 3
Theory of operation
Introduction
This chapter describes the operating principles of the mechanical and electric parts of the
AvantGuard® Electric Bed.
2
Component positioning and electrical diagrams
Figure 3-1. Position of parts
A F

H
3
B

I
J

4
C K
D L
E M 2320_300

Table 3-1. Position of parts

Mark Description
A
B
C
Control unit on a flexible arm
Headboard
Head chassis cover
5
D 5th wheel steering system
a

E HiLow pedal
F Control pendant
G Footboard
H
I
Linen holder
Foot siderail support 6
J Lateral caregiver unit (on each side)
K Foot chassis cover
L Brake bar
M Ø150 mm caster
a. Not shown

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 3 - 1
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Component positioning and electrical diagrams
Chapter 3: Theory of operation

1 P N
Figure 3-2. Position of parts

O W
X

2 Q
Z

AA

3
AB

S
AC
T U V AD 2320_301

4 Mark
Table 3-2. Position of parts

Description
N Medical device support bar
O Adjustable head section damper
P Head siderail
Q Head HiLow column

5 R Power cable
a

S Power supply unit


T Adjustable thigh section motor
U Accessory support bar
V Adjustable foot section motor
W Foot siderail
X CPR cable

6 Y
Z
Extension
Adjustable head section motor
AA Foot HiLow column
AB Power-driven adjustable foot section control a

AC Brake detection contact


AD Egress handle a

7
a. Not shown

Page 3 - 2 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Component positioning and electrical diagrams
Chapter 3: Theory of operation
Configurations and wiring diagrams
The AvantGuard® Electric Bed can be fitted with different controls. The different
configurations are listed below. Only one configuration is possible.
AvantGuard® Electric Bed with EasyChair® function:
• A control unit on a flexible arm
and a caregiver control pendant (see figure 3-3 page 3-4).
• A control unit on a flexible arm
and a patient control pendant (see figure 3-3 page 3-4). 2
• Two caregiver control pendants (see figure 3-4 page 3-5).
• One caregiver control pendant
and a patient control pendant (see figure 3-4 page 3-5).
AvantGuard® Electric Bed without EasyChair® function:

3
• One control unit on a flexible arm (see figure 3-5 page 3-6).
• One caregiver control pendant (see figure 3-4 page 3-5).
• A control unit on a flexible arm
and a caregiver control pendant (see figure 3-6 page 3-7).
• One control unit on a flexible arm
and a patient control pendant (see figure 3-5 page 3-6).

4
• Two caregiver control pendants (see figure 3-6 page 3-7).
• One caregiver control pendant
and a patient control pendant (see figure 3-6 page 3-7).
NOTE:
The dotted lines in the following diagrams represent functions that can be added to the bed.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 3 - 3
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Component positioning and electrical diagrams
Chapter 3: Theory of operation

1 Figure 3-3. Wiring diagram – with EasyChair® function and CUFA

Col-H

2 CUFA*

PSU

LCU LCU

3 Caregiver CP*

ATS

AHS

4
Patient CP*
ECP* AFS ECP*

5 HiLow pedal*
Col-F HiLow pedal*

BS

6
2320(2)_302

7
Page 3 - 4 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Component positioning and electrical diagrams
Chapter 3: Theory of operation
Figure 3-4. Wiring diagram – with EasyChair® function and without CUFA

Col-H

2
PSU

LCU LCU

Caregiver CP* 3
ATS

AHS

Caregiver CP*
4
Patient CP*
ECP* ECP*
AFS

HiLow pedal*
Col-F
HiLow pedal*
5
BS

6
2320(2)_303

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 3 - 5
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Component positioning and electrical diagrams
Chapter 3: Theory of operation

1 Figure 3-5. Wiring diagram – without EasyChair® function and with CUFA

Col-H

2 CUFA*

PSU

LCU LCU

3 Caregiver CP*

ATS

AHS

4
Patient CP*
ECP* ECP*

5 HiLow pedal*
Col-F
HiLow pedal*

BS*

6
2320(2)_304

7
Page 3 - 6 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Component positioning and electrical diagrams
Chapter 3: Theory of operation
Figure 3-6. Wiring diagram – without EasyChair® function and without CUFA

Col-T

2
PSU

LCU LCU

Caregiver CP* 3
ATS

AHS

Caregiver CP*
4
Patient CP*
ECP* ECP*

HiLow pedal*
Col-F
HiLow pedal*
5
BS*

6
2320(2)_305

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 3 - 7
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Component positioning and electrical diagrams
Chapter 3: Theory of operation

1 Figure 3-7. Wiring diagram – with CUFA as an accessory

Col-H

2
PSU

LCU LCU

3 Caregiver CP*

ATS

AHS

4 CUFA*

Patient CP*
ECP* ECP*
AFS

5 HiLow pedal*
Col-F
HiLow pedal*

BS*

6
2320(2)_306

7
Page 3 - 8 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Technical description.
Chapter 3: Theory of operation

Technical description.
The operation of the AvantGuard® Electric Bed can be split into two subsystems :
• Mechanical
• Electrical
The interaction between these subsystems is used to make all the movements of the bed.
The electrical functions are driven by low voltage motors.
Each of the subsystems is described separately in the following paragraphs. The operating
diagrams are at the beginning of the chapter.
2
Mechanical description
The mechanical subsystem consists of two connected systems :

3
• Chassis
• Sleep surface

Retractable head section


The head section is extended in relation to the seat section by attaching the articulations of the
head section to two blocks that slide inside the longitudinal sections of the frame. The hard
surface of the head section is moved telescopically by two elevation arms that have a gear

4
mechanism at one end that drives the hard surface using special notches.

Emergency CPR Release


The yellow CPR handles on either side of the sleep surface are used to disengage the driving
gear located inside the head section motor. The descent of the head section is either power-
driven or damped by two gas-powered actuators.

Power-driven foot section*


The bed 1200 is fitted with a mechanical foot section. The movement is controlled by the handle
that is connected by a cable at the foot of the sleep surface on the right-hand side. This
movement is either powered or damped by a gas-powered actuator.
5
HiLow
The HiLow system uses two columns that are both made up of three metal cages that are moved
in relation to one another by a pantograph system. It is driven by a fixed motor installed at the
base of the mechanism. The travel of the system is 400 mm. Twin upper and lower EOT
contacts provide electric protection. The system does not require any special maintenance
during its nominal service life (see “Preventive maintenance” on page 6-2). Consequently, the
columns can be replaced in the event of a failure, but must only be dismantled or repaired by
6
Hill-Rom personnel.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 3 - 9
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Mechanical description
Chapter 3: Theory of operation

1 Casters
The bed is fitted with four casters (three brake casters and one brake and steering caster), each
with a 30° inclination control mechanism and three positions:
• Brake caster: Brake/Neutral/Neutral positions
• Steering caster: Brake/Neutral/Steering positions
The standard casters can be replaced with anti-static brake casters. They are always fitted in

2 pairs when this function is installed and are identified by a yellow dot on the tread (single band)
or in the centre of each caster (double band). They are located on the left (if the steering caster is
on the right hand of the head end) or on the right of the sleep surface (if the steering caster is on
the left hand of the foot end).

Brakes
The brake system consists of four brake casters controlled by two hexagonal bars with a
connecting bar situated in the right-hand cross member of the chassis. The brake bar is directly

3 mounted on the foot end hexagonal bar of the bed.

Standard steering
The steering caster is positioned on the right, as seen by the patient, at the head of the bed or on
the left at the foot of the bed, depending on the destination. This caster is also controlled by the
brake bar.

5th wheel system with controlled operation


4 The controlled operation steering system is made up of a supporting cross member that is
perpendicularly secured to the chassis and an articulated mechanism that supports a 100 mm-
diameter caster. This mechanism has two articulations:
• The upper articulation is used to index lengthways the subassembly that is obtained by
clicking together the cable and the brake pedal in the steering position. The mobile
subassembly can be rotated when the brake pedal is placed in the neutral position.

5 • The lower articulation of the mobile part, in combination with a gas-powered actuator, is
used to pass the thresholds without provoking any movement of the bed that may cause
discomfort for the patient.
NOTE:
If the 5th steering wheel with controlled operation is installed as standard, all four casters are
identical and there is no standard steering caster. This function is incompatible with 125 mm-
diameter casters.

6 Construction of the long metal siderails*


The siderails are made of four tubes attached to two mobile head and foot sections that form a
deformable parallelogram.
• Each head siderail has a release system with a double safety lock.
• The siderails are lowered in two successive steps:
a. Press the first release button and gently push the siderail towards the head of the bed at
7 the same time. The latter action slides the catch in its support, which is designed to
prevent accidental release.
b. Press the second release button and lower the siderail.
Each siderail can be removed quickly and is secured on the bed by a system of clips.

Page 3 - 10 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Mechanical description
Chapter 3: Theory of operation
Construction of the TotalGuard™ siderails
The siderail subassemblies are made up of fire-proof, extruded polypropylene head and foot
sections mounted on a deformable parallelogramme-shaped metal support.
• Each head siderail includes a double-safety release system with two positions that can be
adapted to the different mattress widths.
• The siderail is lowered by sliding the release button and gently pushing the siderail towards

2
the centre of the sleep surface. The latter action slides the catch in its support, which is
designed to prevent accidental release.
• Each foot siderail is clicked into place on the corresponding head siderail by a system of
injected plastic clips that allow for rotational movement. The siderail can only be clipped or
unclipped when the foot siderail is folded away on the head siderail.
• The metal supports are made up of three articulated arms: one central arm and two side
arms.

3
The siderails and supports form a solid assembly.

Foot siderail supports*


The TotalGuard™ foot siderail supports are retractable mechanisms that include a latch to lock
and unlock the foot siderail.

Headboard and footboard

4
Plastic headboard and footboard*
The headboard and footboard are made of extruded/blow-moulded plastic with chrome-plated
steel clasps for assembly and have decorative trim panels.
Plastic lockable footboard*
The lockable footboard is secured to the bed by a system of screws with a gear knob that is used
to tighten and loosen manually.
Headboard and footboard with wooden trim*
The headboard and footboard are made of decorative and wooden panels with chrome-plated 5
steel clasps for assembly.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 3 - 11
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Electrical description
Chapter 3: Theory of operation

1 Electrical description
Specifications of the bed:
Table 3-3. Specifications of the 1200

Description Specifications
Type Electric Bed

2 Part number
Type of protection against electric shock
1200
Class I
(according to IEC 60601-1)
Degree of protection against electric shock Type B
(according to IEC 60601-1)
Protection offered by the covers IPX4

3
(according to IEC 60529)
Intermittent operation 10% 3 min/30 min a

Voltage 230 V AC 120V AC 100V AC


Frequency 50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz
Power supply unit maximum 360 VA 360 VA 360 VA
power load

4
a. Do not operate electrical functions continuously for more than 3 minutes in any 30 minute
period when the bed is loaded at the safe working load value as this may damage electrical
components.

Refer to the wiring diagrams at the beginning of this chapter for more specific information
about the wiring.
The bed is operated by a power supply unit (PSU). This unit controls the electrical functions of

5
the bed: HiLow (Col-H and Col-F), adjustable head section (AHS) and adjustable thigh section
(ATS) with autocontour and adjustable foot section (AFS) (see “Configurations and wiring
diagrams” page 3-3).
These functions are performed by motors using a very low continuously secure voltage.

Power supply unit characteristics


Table 3-4. Power supply unit characteristics

6 Description
Input characteristics
Specifications
(see table 3-3 on page 3-12)
Voltage 230 V AC 120 V AC 100 V AC
Fuse rating on primary 2AT 2.5 A T 2.5 A T
Maximum absorbed power 360 VA 360 VA 360 VA
Output voltage 18 to 34 V AC rectified, filtered

7 Output power
Intermittent service
360 VA 360 VA
10% (3 min every 30 min)
360 VA

Page 3 - 12 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Electrical description
Chapter 3: Theory of operation
The power supply unit is made up of several main parts:
• Power Stage
• Function controls by relays and transistors
• Battery charging circuit
• Control logic circuits, specific functions
The functions are electrically activated after being electrically unlocked by:
• The control pendant
• The control unit on a flexible arm
2
• The lateral caregiver unit
• The HiLow pedal (HL only)

The power stage


The power stage is made up of an transformer, protected at the input by two delayed fuses (see
table 3-4 on page 3-12) and a rectifier bridge and filter capacitor at the output. The output 3
voltage V DC 1 is not regulated. The level of the voltage varies around 24 V DC, depending on
the power requirement. The transformer is also protected by an internal non-resettable thermal
protective device. The output power is used to control several function simultaneously.
V DC 1 also flows through two regulators that deliver V DC 2 = 15 V DC (+/-3V) for the
analogue components (comparators, battery charge check circuit, etc.) and V DC3 = 3.3 VDC

4
(+/-10%) for the logic circuit components (control pendant, etc.).
This power supply stage includes a protective device against electrostatic discharges (ESD) of
20 KV.

Function control
The motors are controlled by relays. In order to protect these relays from electrical arcing during
switching, an FET transistor that is series-mounted with all the outputs checks the power after a
delay when a function is activated, allowing the relays to switch off. Similarly, when a function
control is released, this FET transistor cuts off the power before the contact switch opens.
Overload limitation: overload is limited by permanently checking the current at each motor
5
output. In the event of overload or mechanical jamming, the power supply of the motor is cut by
the control transistor without impacting the other motors, except in special cases. In these cases,
the overload is indicated by an audible alarm. The current check is also used to detect faults in
the motor EOT, apart from for the HL columns that have a second safety EOT.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 3 - 13
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Electrical description
Chapter 3: Theory of operation

1 Battery circuit
The bed can be equipped with backup battery and/or a backup battery for the “Shock” function.
These batteries are included inside the PSU. The “Shock” function battery can only be used for
this particular function. The common charging circuit in the power supply unit has a current
limiter, according to the level of the battery charge. Charging begins as soon as the unit is
connected to AC power. At the end of charging, the load current is very low.
When the power supply unit is disconnected from the mains, the battery backup is activated by
pressing the “Activate Battery” button on the control pendant.
2 An audible battery low alarm buzzer sounds and an indicator light flashes during movement if
the battery voltage drops (a continuous beep lasting a few seconds each time a control is
pressed).
Once the bed is connect to the mains, this indicator light continues to flash as long as the battery
is not charged.
Operation on the battery is automatically inhibited about 30 seconds after the end of the last
controlled movement.

3 Battery characteristics
Table 3-5. Battery backup characteristics

Description Specifications
Composition Two 12 V elements
Capacity of each element 1.2 Ah min.

4
Voltage 24 V DC
Circuit breaker with fuse 10 AT – 250 V
Maximum charging time 12 hours
Discharging time (storage), battery connected to bed Minimum 10 days
Discharging time (storage), battery not connected to 3 months
bed

5 Table 3-6. Characteristics of the “Shock” function battery


1

Description Specifications
Composition Two 12 V elements
Capacity of each element 0,7 Ah min.
Voltage 24 V DC
Circuit breaker with fuse 5 AT – 250 V

6 Maximum charging time


Discharging time (storage), battery connected to bed
10 hours
Minimum 10 days
Discharging time (storage), battery not connected to 3 months
bed

7
1. The “Shock” function battery is only included if the bed is equipped with the “Shock” function AND the backup
battery.

Page 3 - 14 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Electrical description
Chapter 3: Theory of operation
The sealed lead acid batteries are series connected to the main PCB and protected by fuses on
the connecting wires.
The battery type has no memory effect and can be charged regularly without any particular
constraints.
Recap of the memory effect: certain types of battery (Nickel Cadmium) must be fully
discharged before being recharged. Disregarding this caution may cause significantly reduce
their service life.
“Shock” battery capacity when fully recharged: minimum of three complete cycles in the
“Shock” position from the complete RT position and raised AHS position with the safe
operating load on the bed.
2
Battery backup capacity when fully recharged: minimum of three complete raise/lower cycles of
the HL, AHS, ATS and AFS with the safe operating load on the bed (185 kg).

Control logic circuits, specific functions


• Combined use of the motors for the functions.
– “Shock” position, 3
– EasyChair®,
– Return to flat sleep surface,
– Autocontour.
• Lock management.
• Interface of the control unit.
• “Bed not in lowered position” indicator (see ““Bed is not in low position” detection” page
4
3-17).
• “Bed connected to AC power, brake not applied” detection (see “"Bed connected to mains,
brake not applied" detection*” page 3-18).
All of these functions are integrated in a Complex Programmable Logic Device.

Control pendant*
Two models of the control pendant are available, depending on the bed model. Each unit is
5
powered by a 3.3 V DC supply from the power supply PCB and includes three main functions.
• Filter and amplification of input signals for electrostatic protection and signal forming.
• Multiplexing for button management.
• Demultiplexing for indicator light management.
The button and indicator light data are serial transmitted (SPI) in order to reduce the number of
conductors. The timeclock signal used for the data exchanges is generated by the power PCB.
6
All of these data are transmitted in a few tenths of milliseconds. When the system is in standby
mode, the power supply is cut and the timeclock signal is no longer generated. The battery mode
button is then directly connected and remains operational at all times.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 3 - 15
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Electrical description
Chapter 3: Theory of operation

1 Control unit on a flexible arm*


Two configurations of the control unit on a flexible arm are available, just like the control
pendant, and are identical in design.

Lateral caregiver unit


Two models are available, depending on whether the “Shock” function is available. These units
are located on each side of the sleep surface and include:

2 • a “Shock” function button,


• a caregiver mode control,
• three electric function lock/unlock buttons,
• three electric function lock/unlock indicator lights,
• a battery charge light,

3 • a connector for the control unit.


All of the signals are conveyed by a single wire connected to the PSU.
NOTE:
The LCU assembly must include the wiring, the switches and the connections.

Motor characteristics
The specifications of the motors are as follows:

4 Table 3-7. Motor characteristics

HiLow column
Description AHS motor ATS motor AFS motor
motor
Absorbed 96 W (x2) 120 W 84 W 84 W
power

5
Voltage 18 to 40 V DC 18 to 40 V DC 18 to 40 V DC 18 to 40 V DC
Intermittent 10% 10% 10 % 10 %
service (3 min/30 min) (2 min/18 min) (6 min/60 min) (6 min/60 min)
Actuator/ 400 mm ±5 mm 239 mm ±2 mm 60 mm ±2 mm 45 mm ±2 mm
column travel
Centre-to- 458 mm ±2 mm 310 mm ±2 mm 325 mm ±2 mm
centre distance

6
with rod
retracted

7
Page 3 - 16 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Electrical description
Chapter 3: Theory of operation
Motor control
The motors are powered by the power supply unit. The end positions are detected by the series-
mounted, upper and lower internal EOTs. The EOTs directly cut off the power supply of the HS,
TS and FS. The TS and FS motors also have an internal intermediate contact to control the
autocontour and “EasyChair” positions.
The two HL columns also have internal upper and lower EOTs. Each EOT also has a safety
mechanism at each extremity. If one of the safety EOTs is activated, then the column cannot be
used. The other functions remain operational.

WARNING:
2
The column must be replaced when one of the safety EOTs is activated or the internal
mechanism is defective. The column must not be dismantled under any circumstances.
Disregarding this caution may compromise the safety of the patient or users.
In addition to the EOTs, the “Overload limit” function of the PSU also provides protection in the

3
event of mechanical failure, obstacles or overload.

“Bed is not in low position” detection


This function is performed by controlling the status of the EOTs at the base of the HL columns.
The PSU powers up the corresponding indicator light on the control unit as soon as one of the
two EOTs is released.

Autocontour
The PSU checks the autocontour function of the bed (AHS and ATS). This function is
performed using an intermediate contact of the ATS motor. 4
When the Raise HS function is activated while in the horizontal position, the head section and
thigh section simultaneously rise until the internal EOT contact of the ATS motor cuts its power
at an angle of approximately 20°. The AHS motor continues to operate until it reaches its upper
EOT or until the control is released.
When the Lower HS function is activated and the corresponding section reaches the lowered
position, the ATS motor operates in descent mode until it reaches its lower EOT or until the
control is released. 5
NOTE:
If the Lower HS button is released before the TS reaches the lowered position, the autocontour
function is switched off. The TS must then be lowered using the Lower TS function.

EasyChair®* function
This function combines movements of the bed frame sections and uses the internal intermediate
contacts of the TS and FS motors to control the interaction between the two sections. 6

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 3 - 17
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Electrical description
Chapter 3: Theory of operation

1 “Shock” function*
When the “Shock” function is switched on using the button on the caregiver LCU, the PSU
simultaneously places the HS, TS and FS in the flat position and moves the sleep surface to the
Trendelenburg position. Both columns are activated until the maximum Trendelenburg position
is reached, as long as the controls are on. The movement stops once the EOTs are reached. The
special battery means that this function can be used when no mains power supply is available.
This battery is independent of the backup battery. However, the battery charge circuit is
common.

2 "Bed connected to mains, brake not applied" detection*


This systems uses an NO contact mounted on the foot cross member that is activated by the
hexagonal bar and the brakes. The PSU commands an audible beep if the two following
conditions are met: mains power available and switch off. The signal stops when the brake is
applied or when the power cable is unplugged from the mains socket.

Trendelenburg/Reverse Trendelenburg*
3 This fully electric function is only available to caregivers. This function is accessed using the
Caregiver mode on the caregiver LCU and is activated using the control unit. The two HL
columns are actuated in the opposite direction from the required position, irrespective of the
initial height and position of the sleep surface. The two columns continue to move as long as
one of the two buttons remains pressed, until the internal EOT are reached. The maximum angle
can be reached as long as mains power or battery backup is available.
NOTE:

4 The warranty is automatically annulled if any electrical component of the bed is opened, apart
from if the cover of the power supply unit is opened by an authorised person.

7
Page 3 - 18 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008

Chapter 4
Procedures for the removal,
replacement and adjustment
of parts
2
Tool and supply requirements
To service the AvantGuard® Electric Bed, the following tools and supplies are required:
• One ratchet wrench (P/N: Facom: S.151)
• One extension (P/N: Facom: S.210)
• One 13 mm 12-point socket wrench (P/N: Facom: S.13)
• One 6 mm open end combination wrench (P/N: Facom: 39.6)
3
• One 8 mm open end combination wrench (P/N: Facom: 39.8)
• Two 10 mm open end combination wrenches (P/N: Facom: 39.10)
• One 13 mm open end combination wrench (P/N: Facom: 39.13)
• One 17 mm open end combination wrench (P/N: Facom: 39.11)
• One Torx® T25 wrench (P/N: Facom: 89S25)

1

One 6 mm Allen® key (P/N: Facom: 82H6)


2
44
• One 10 mm Allen® key (P/N: Facom: 82H10)
• One small flat screwdriver (P/N: Facom: AR.3x75)
• One medium-sized Philips head screwdriver (P/N: Facom: AP.2x100)
• One soft faced hammer


One 8 mm pin punch (P/N: Facom: 249.8)
One elevation tool (P/N: AG0052) (see figure 4-1 page 4-2)
5
• Loctite® 242 adhesive
3

• One can of beige paint (P/N: CO0400)


• One pot of medical Vaseline (approx. 400 g) (P/N: CO1131)
• One pair of 6 mm Truarc® cutting pliers (P/N: OU0426)
4

• One pair of pliers 6

1. Torx® is a registered trademark of Textron, Inc.


2. Allen® is a registered trademark of Industrial Fasteners, Inc.
7
3. Loctite® is a registered trademark of Loctite Corporation.
4. Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 1


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 Figure 4-1. One elevation tool (P/N: AG0052)

3 2320_400

Identification
Parts can be located on the bed before proceeding with the removal and replacement procedures.

4 See “Component positioning and electrical diagrams” page 3-1.

7
Page 4 - 2 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.1 Securing and locking out the electric functions
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.1 Securing and locking out the electric functions
The movement of all mobile parts of the bed must be inhibited when removing or replacing
parts.
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
The current flows through the connectors when the bed is switched on. Staff may be
injured if the bed is not disconnected from the power source.

1. Lock all of the functions.


2. Unplug the bed from its electric power source. If the bed is equipped with a battery, check
2
that none of the lights on the control unit are on. If this is not the case, wait for about one
minute until the battery mode is switched off.

3. Check that the battery mode is switched off by pressing one of the function buttons on the
control unit (apart from the battery button).

44

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 3
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.2 PSU cover and central rail cable shield
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.2 PSU cover and central rail cable shield


Time required: 5 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench

Removal
2 1. Raise the head section to the high position.

1. Unscrew and remove the two screws (A) from the cover attachment (B) on the PSU using
the 13 mm ratchet wrench, retrieve the two screws and remove the cover (B) by unclipping
the ends (see figure 4-2 page 4-4).

2. Remove the cable shield (C).

3 Figure 4-2. PSU cover and cable shield

A
A

4 B
2320_411

NOTE:
The need to complete step 2 depends on the procedure in question.

Replacement

5 1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

7
Page 4 - 4 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.3 Replacing the hard surfaces of the SS, TS and FS
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.3 Replacing the hard surfaces of the SS, TS and FS
Time required: 5 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: None

Removal
1. Apply the brakes, raise the bed to the high position and raise the head section. 2
2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).
3. Foot section hard surface: Remove the footboard from the bed, then grip the hard surface of
the foot section on both sides of the sleep surface (A) next to the fasteners for the restraining
straps and extract it by tilting it towards the foot of the bed (see figure 4-3 page 4-5).

Figure 4-3. Overview

C
3
B
A

44
2320_401

4. Thigh section hard surface: Grip the hard surface (B) on both sides of the sleep surface and
remove it from the bed.
5. Seat section hard surface: Grip the hard surface (C) on both sides of the sleep surface and
remove it from the bed.
5
Replacement
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

6
NOTE:
The SS, TS and FS hard surfaces are secured by the fasteners for retaining straps on both sides of
the sleep surface.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 5
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.4 Replacing the HS hard surface
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.4 Replacing the HS hard surface


Time required: 10 min
Number of persons: 1 (plus 1 occasionally)
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: 1 medium Philips head screwdriver
(if the bed is fitted with a control unit on a flexible arm)

2
One small flat screwdriver
One pair of 6 mm Truarc® cutting pliers
1

Removal
1. Apply the brakes, raise the bed to the high position and raise the head section. Place the
siderails in the folded and raised position.
2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).

3 3. Proceed as follows to remove the hard surface of the head section.


NOTE:
If the bed is fitted with a control unit on a flexible arm, it must be removed first (refer to
procedure 4.6)
a. Remove the Truarc® rings (A), the spacers (B) and screws (C) and (D) (see figure 4-4
page 4-6).

4
b. Perform the same operation on the other side of the bed.

Figure 4-4. Attaching the hard surface of the head section


H
D
C

5
B

6 2320_402 2320_403

CAUTION:
The head section must always be flat when removing or installing the hard surface.
Disregarding this precaution may lead to incorrect positioning and cause the sliding

7 elevation system to malfunction.


c. Place the head section flat using one of the CPR controls.

1. Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.

Page 4 - 6 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.4 Replacing the HS hard surface
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
d. Remove the screw (E) and turn the guide (G) towards the middle of the bed (see figure
4-5 page 4-7).
e. Perform the same operation on the other side of the bed.
NOTE:
Do not remove the screw (F). This screw supports the guide and the rack.

Figure 4-5. Guiding the hard surface of the head section

G 2
E

F
3
2320_404 2320_405

f. Slightly lift the hard surface at the foot end and slide it towards the head of the bed to
release the supports (H) (see figure 4-4 page 4-6). 44
Replacement
CAUTION:
The head section must always be flat when removing or installing the hard surface.
Disregarding this precaution may lead to incorrect positioning and cause the sliding
elevation system to malfunction.
1. Proceed as follows to install the hard surface of the HS:
5
a. Mount the hard surface on the supports (H) (see figure 4-4 page 4-6).
b. Turn the guides (G) towards the interior (see figure 4-5 page 4-7)
c. Slightly lift the hard surface at the foot end and fully slide it towards the head of the

6
bed and then lower it onto the rack.
d. Turn the guides (G), then tighten and lock the screw (E).
e. Place the head section in the raised position using one of the CPR handles, while
checking that the teeth on the AHS shaft do not come out of the rack.
f. Tighten and lock the screws (C) and (D) (see figure 4-4 page 4-6).
g. Install the spacers (B) and Truarc® rings (A).
1

7
1. Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 7


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.4 Replacing the HS hard surface
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 WARNING:
Two persons are required to test the AHS articulation. Failure to follow this
recommendation could result in injury.

2. Grip the handles on the edges of the head section and activate one of the CPR handles. Raise
and lower the head section to make sure that the hard surface moves freely.

2
3. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

7
Page 4 - 8 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.5 Replacing the control pendant*
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.5 Replacing the control pendant*
Time required: 5 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:Yes
Tools required: None

Removal
1. Identify the model of the control pendant to be replaced (with or without EasyChair®) in
order to make sure that the replacement model performs the same functions.
2
2. If possible, raise the head section, then raise the siderails and lock them into place.

3. Apply the brakes and place the bed in the raised position.

3
4. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).
5. Identify the connection of the control unit on the bed on the rear of the left-hand or right-
hand LCU and disconnect the connector (A) from the LCU by pulling (no special lock) (see
figure 4-6 page 4-9).

Figure 4-6. Connection of the control unit

A A 44
B
B

5
2320(2)_406 2320_438 2320_439

Replacement
1. Identify the version of the control pendant to be replaced (with or without EasyChair®) in
order to make sure that the replacement model performs the same functions.

2. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.


NOTE:
Use the fool-proofers (B) to make sure that the connector (A) is inserted in the LCU the right
way round (see figure 4-6 page 4-9).
6
3. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 9
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.6 Replacing the control unit on a flexible arm
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.6 Replacing the control unit on a flexible arm


Time required: 15 min
Number of persons: 1 (plus 1 occasionally)
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:no
Tools required: One medium-sized Philips head screwdriver

Removal
2 1. Identify the model of the control unit on a flexible arm to be replaced (with or without
EasyChair®) in order to make sure that the replacement model performs the same functions.

2. Lower the siderails, raise the head section and remove the headboard.

3. Apply the brakes, place the bed in the raised position and secure the bed (refer to procedure
4.1).

3 4. Inspect the assembly of the control unit on a flexible arm on the adjustable head section
structure. It is secured to the hard surface by the threaded knob (A). The cable is secured by
the supports (B) and is guided by the notch (C) (see figure 4-7 page 4-10).
Figure 4-7. Attachment of the control unit on a flexible arm

4 C

5 2320_407
D
2320_408

5. Remove the hard surfaces of the seat and thigh sections (see procedure 4.3).

6. Remove the cable shield (D) from the central rail on the bed frame. Note that the cable is
always taut on the AHS articulation when the head section is fully raised (see figure 4-7

6
page 4-10).

7. For beds fitted with a control unit on a flexible arm as standard, proceed as follows:
a. Disconnect the connector (E) from the connection plate (F) (see figure 4-8 page 4-10).
Figure 4-8. Connection plate

7 F
E

2320(2)_409

Page 4 - 10 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.6 Replacing the control unit on a flexible arm
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
b. Remove the control cable on the flexible arm from the duct.

8. For beds fitted with a control unit on a flexible arm as an accessory, proceed as follows:
a. Disconnect the connector (G) of the control unit on a flexible arm cable from the rear
of the left-hand LCU (H) (see figure 4-9 page 4-11).
b. Cut the clamps (I) securing the left-hand LCU and control unit on a flexible arm cables
to the cross member (J).

Figure 4-9. Attaching the CUFA and the LCU cables to the bed frame 2
I J

H
3
G
2320(2)_420

c. Remove the control cable on the flexible arm from the duct. 44
9. Loosen and remove the screws retaining the two supports (B) using the Philips head
screwdriver. Remove the supports (see figure 4-7 page 4-10).

10. Extract the connector of the control unit on a flexible arm from the notch (C) by gently
pushing beneath the HS hard surface in order to release it from the AHS structure (see figure

5
4-7 page 4-10).
11. Unscrew the threaded knob (A) securing the control unit on a flexible arm and extract it
from the HS hard surface.

Replacement
1. Identify the version of the control unit on a flexible arm to be replaced (1200 or 1400) in
order to make sure that the replacement model performs the same functions.

2. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order. 6


3. Grip the handles on the edges of the head section and activate one of the CPR handles. Raise
and lower the head section to make sure that the hard surface moves freely.

4. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 11
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.7 Replacing the power cable
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.7 Replacing the power cable


WARNING:
Only the power cables included in Chapter 5 can be used with the AvantGuard®
electric bed. Using other cables may compromise the compliance and safety of the
bed.
Time required: 10 min

2
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One medium-sized Philips head screwdriver
One 13 mm ratchet wrench

Removal
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:

3 The current flows through the connectors when the bed is switched on. Staff may be
injured if the bed is not disconnected from the power source.

1. Apply the brakes, place the sleep surface, the head section and the siderails in the raised
position and remove the headboard.

2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).

4
3. Using the Torx® T25 wrench, remove the screw (A) securing the ground cable (B) to the
chassis and remove the ground cable from the spiral of the power cable (according to
version).

4. Remove the two screws securing the protection system (C) of the power cable on the right-
hand side of the chassis (as seen by the patient) using the medium-sized Philips head
screwdriver. The straight section of the cable (D) fits in the protection system (C) (see figure
4-10 page 4-12).

5 Figure 4-10. Attaching the power cable and the ground cable

B
A

6 D
2320_410

5. Remove the cover of the power supply unit (refer to procedure 4.2).

6. Note the path of the power cable (E) then unclip and remove the power cable from the mains

7
input terminal block (F) inside the power supply unit (see figure 4-11 page 4-13).

Page 4 - 12 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.7 Replacing the power cable
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
Figure 4-11. Connection of the power cable

F E

2320_412
2
Replacement
1. Perform the removal operations in reverse order, making sure that the connector is securely
plugged into the mains input terminal block (F).

3
2. Place the bed in the Reverse Trendelenburg position and then in the Trendelenburg position
to check that the cable is long enough and does not damage the power supply unit or the
protection system.
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
The ground conductors, the grounding spring leaves and the grounding braids must be
correctly installed to establish the equipotential ground connection of the metal parts.
Technical staff and caregivers may be injured if the installation is incorrect and/or
continuity is not established.

3. Check the continuity with the ground of the accessible metal parts (see “Grounding
44
resistance” on page 6-4 of the preventive maintenance programme).
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
An unusually strong current leak is indicative of internal damage to the power supply
unit cable. Users of the bed are at risk when the value of the current leak is greater

5
than 500 micro Amps.
4. Check the leak current of the bed (see “Leakage current” on page 6-5 of the preventive
maintenance).

5. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 13
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.8 Replacing the power supply unit
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.8 Replacing the power supply unit


Time required: 20 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench
NOTE:

2 The batteries are not supplied with the power supply unit. When replacing the power supply
unit, always check the dates on the batteries and replace them if they are more than five years
old.

Removal
1. Apply the brakes, place the head section and the siderails in the raised position and remove
the headboard.

3 2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


3. Remove the cover of the power supply unit (refer to procedure 4.2).
4. Note the paths of the cables in the power supply unit and their connections to the main PCB
(A) and the mains input terminal block (B) (see figure 4-12 page 4-14).
Figure 4-12. Power supply unit
N°1a N°1b N°2 N°3 N°4 N°5

4 F
A

B
C

5 N°6
D
E
G
2320_414

Figure 4-13. Connections on the main PCB


N°2 N°3 N°4 N°5

6
N°6

N°1a
7
N°1b 2320_415

Page 4 - 14 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.8 Replacing the power supply unit
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
5. Release the mains power cable (C) by unclipping it from the mains input terminal block (B).

6. Disconnect the various connectors on the main PCB (A) from the power supply unit.
Identify the different connectors using the colour codes and markings available on each one
(see table 4-1 on page 4-15).
Table 4-1. Power supply connections

2
Connector
Mark Colour Identification

0 N°0 Red Not used
1a N°1a Grey LCU or circuit box
1b N°1b Grey LCU or circuit box
2 N°2 Green Adjustable foot section motor
3 N°3 Blue Adjustable head section motor
4
5
N°4
N°5
Yellow
Brown
Foot HiLow column
Adjustable thigh section motor
3
6 N°6 Yellow Head HiLow column

7. Pinch the lugs of the two grounding wires of the intermediate structure (D) and the foot
HiLow column (E) on the mains input terminal block (B) by hand and release the conductors
(see figure 4-12 page 4-14).

8. If the bed if fitted with backup batteries, disconnect the backup battery cables (F) and the
“Shock” function cables (G) and remove the batteries from the power supply unit.
44
9. Extract the power supply unit from the bed.

Replacement

5
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.
2. Check the dates on the batteries and replace them if they are more than five years old.
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
The ground conductor and the grounding spring leaves must be correctly installed to
establish the equipotential ground connection of the metal parts. Technical staff and
caregivers may be injured if the installation is incorrect and/or continuity is not
established.

3. Check the continuity with the ground of the accessible metal parts (see “Grounding
resistance” on page 6-4 of the preventive maintenance programme).
6
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
An unusually strong current leak is indicative of internal damage to the PSU cable.
Users of the bed are at risk when the value of the current leak is greater than 500 micro
Amps.

4. Check the leak current of the bed (see “Leakage current” on page 6-5 of the preventive
maintenance).
7
5. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 15


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.9 Replacing the backup battery and the Shock* function battery
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.9 Replacing the backup battery and the Shock* function battery
Time required: 10 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench

Removal
2 1. Apply the brakes and place the HS in the raised position. Place the siderails in the raised
position and remove the headboard.

2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


3. Remove the cover of the power supply unit (refer to procedure 4.2).

3
4. Extract the two elements of the backup battery (A) or the Shock function battery (B) from
their housing in the power supply unit (see figure 4-14 page 4-16).

5. Note the connections of the wires to the battery elements when replacing the backup battery:
the red wire (C) on the exterior + red terminals, the black wire (D) on the exterior terminal
and the short wire between the two central terminals. Then disconnect the wires (see figure
4-14 page 4-16).

6. When replacing the Shock function battery, each element has its own cable with a specific

4 connector (E). Remove the connectors from the two elements and extract them.

Figure 4-14. Backup battery and “Shock” battery connections

5 D C

6
2320_417 2320_418

Replacement
1. Perform the removal operations in reverse order, making sure that the polarities are
respected when connecting new batteries.
NOTE:
The connectors of the backup battery and the Shock function battery are different in order to

7 avoid errors.

Page 4 - 16 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.9 Replacing the backup battery and the Shock* function battery
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
NOTE:
When connecting the elements of the backup battery, the red wire must be connected last. A
spark is produced when making the connection that is of no danger to either the technical staff
or the power PCB.
CAUTION:
Always respect the polarity when installing the parts of the backup battery.
Disregarding this precaution may cause irreparable damage to the bed's power PCB.

2. Disconnect the bed from the mains power supply, then perform the tests according to the
batteries present on the bed.
2
– Backup battery after full recharge: at least three complete raise/lower cycles of the
HiLow, HS, TS and FS.
– “Shock” function battery: minimum of three complete cycles in the Shock position
from the complete RT position and raised AHS position.
NOTE:
A technician may lie on the bed during these tests.
3
3. Fully charge the batteries at the end of the test or if the audible battery low alarm sounds
during the tests.

4. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

44

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 17
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.10 Replacing a lateral caregiver unit
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.10 Replacing a lateral caregiver unit


Time required: 15 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench
One pair of cutting pliers

2 Removal
1. Identify the version of the lateral caregiver unit to be replaced (with or without Shock
function) in order to make sure that the replacement model performs the same functions.

2. Apply the brakes, place the bed in the raised position and raise the head section and the
siderails. Remove the headboard and then hard surfaces of the seat and thigh sections (refer
to procedure 4.3).

3 3. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


4. Remove the cable shield from the central rail (refer to procedure 4.2).

5. To remove an LCU from a bed without a control unit on a flexible arm, proceed as follows:
a. Remove the cover of the power supply unit (refer to procedure 4.2).
b. On the main PCB in the power supply unit, disconnect connector “N°1a” or “N°1b” of
4 the cable of the LCU to be replaced (see figure 4-13 page 4-14) and remove the cable
from the central rail on the bed frame.
c. Cut the cable clamps (A) on the bed frame cross member (B) and release the LCU
cable (see figure 4-15 page 4-18).

Figure 4-15. Attachment of the lateral caregiver unit

5 A B

6
C
2320_422

d. Disconnect the CP connector (C) if it is connected to the lateral caregiver unit.


e. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, loosen the screw (D) securing the lateral caregiver
7 unit (E) to the bed frame and remove it from the bed.

Page 4 - 18 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.10 Replacing a lateral caregiver unit
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
6. To remove an LCU from a bed fitted with a control unit on a flexible arm, proceed as
follows:
a. Press the safety clamp (F), then disconnect the connector (G) from the circuit box (H)
in the central rail (see figure 4-16 page 4-19).

Figure 4-16. LCU/CUFA cable circuit box


H
G
2

b. Remove the cable from the central rail in the bed frame.
2320_421
3
c. Cut the cable clamps (A) on the bed frame cross member (B) and release the LCU
cable (see figure 4-15 page 4-18).
d. Disconnect the CP connector (C) if it is connected to the lateral caregiver unit.

44
e. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, loosen the screw (D) securing the lateral caregiver
unit (E) to the bed frame and remove it from the bed.

Replacement
1. Identify the functions of the lateral caregiver unit to be replaced (with or without “Shock”
function) in order to make sure that the replacement model performs the same functions.

2. Perform the removal operations in reverse order, according to the configuration of the bed
(with or without control unit on a flexible arm).

3. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.


5

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 19
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.11 Replacing the LCU/CUFA circuit box
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.11 Replacing the LCU/CUFA circuit box


Time required: 5 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench

Removal
2 1. Apply the brakes, place the bed in the raised position and raise the head section and the
siderails. Remove the headboard and then hard surfaces of the seat and thigh sections (refer
to procedure 4.3).

2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


3. Remove the power supply unit cover and the cable shield on the central rail (refer to

3 procedure 4.2).

4. On the main PCB in the power supply unit, disconnect connector “N°1a” or “N°1b” of the
cable of the circuit box (see figure 4-13 page 4-14).

5. Press the safety clamp (A), then disconnect the connector (B) from the circuit box (C) in the
central rail (see figure 4-17 page 4-20).

6. Disconnect the connector (D).

4 Figure 4-17. LCU/CUFA cable circuit box

B C

5 A
D

2320_419

f. Remove the cable from the central rail in the bed frame.

Replacement
6 7. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

8. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

7
Page 4 - 20 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.12 Replacing the adjustable head section motor
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.12 Replacing the adjustable head section motor
NOTE:
For greater clarity, two separate procedures are used to remove the adjustable head section
motor and its release cable (CPR). Nevertheless, these two parts belong to the same kit with a
single P/N.
Time required: 30 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One small screwdriver
2
One pair of 6 mm Truarc® cutting pliers
1

Removal
1. Apply the brakes, raise the head section and place the sleep surface, the thigh section and the
foot section in the flat position. Place the siderails in the folded and lowered position.
Remove the headboard.
NOTE:
3
If the adjustable head section motor is defective, the CPR control can be used to raise the head
section.
2. Remove the SS and TS hard surfaces (refer to procedure 4.3).
3. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).
4. Remove the power supply unit cover and the cable shield on the central rail (refer to
procedure 4.2).
44
5. On the main PCB in the power supply unit, disconnect connector “N°3” of the adjustable
head section motor (see figure 4-13 page 4-14).
6. Remove the cable from the central rail.

5
7. Activate the CPR control and place the head section flat.
8. Perform steps 1 to 8 of the procedure to replace the CPR cable (refer to procedure 4.13).
9. Remove the Truarc® ring from the pin at the end of the AHS motor shaft and remove the pin
while holding the motor.
10. Remove the Truarc® ring from the pin securing the body of the motor and remove the pin
while holding the motor.

Replacement
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.
6
CAUTION:
Make sure that the elastic on the new motors is not wound around the motor body
before removing it (cut). If necessary, turn the motor end rod in the appropriate
direction to unwind this elastic. It is used to indicate the correct position of the switches
and internal end of travel stops of the motor. If they are incorrectly positioned, the motor
or the bed structure may be damaged. 7
2. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.
1. Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 21


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.13 Replacing the CPR Cable
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.13 Replacing the CPR Cable


NOTE:
The adjustable head section release cable is Y-shaped and is common to both CPR handles.
However, the sections without sheaths are not the same length on both sides.
Time required: 15 min
Number of persons: 1

2 Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No


Tools required: Two 10 mm open end wrenches
One small flat screwdriver
One 7 mm open end wrench
One N°3 Allen® key 1

One pair of 6 mm Truarc® cutting pliers


2

Removal
3 1. Note that both sides of the CPR cable (D) pass behind the pivotal point (E) in the bed frame
cross member (see figure 4-18 page 4-22).

2. Details on the cable position:


– The side of the cable arriving from the right of the pivotal point (E) passes behind the
point and continues to the left,

4 – The side of the cable arriving from the left of the pivotal point (E) also passes behind
the point and continues to the right.

Figure 4-18. CPR cable and pivotal point

H E

5
D H
A I
2320_428 2320_431

6 3. Loosen the adjuster (A) using the 10 mm open-end wrenches.

4. Pull on the CPR cable sheath in order to release the adjuster (A) from its support.

5. Using the two open-end 10 mm wrenches, loosen the retaining nut of the sheath (B) and
release the CPR cable from the guide on the motor (see figure 4-20 page 4-23)

6. Pull on a CPR handle and extract the cable cover (F) and then the end of the cable from the

7 cable stop (G) on the CPR handle using the small flat screwdriver. Repeat the operation on
the other handle (see figure 4-19 page 4-23).

1. Allen® is a registered trademark of Industrial Fasteners, Inc.


2. Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.

Page 4 - 22 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.13 Replacing the CPR Cable
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
Figure 4-19. Attachment of the CPR cable

F G

2
2320_429 2320_430

7. Remove the Truarc® ring (H), the pin (I) and the pivot (E) (see figure 4-18 page 4-22).
1

8. Remove the two ends of the CPR cable from the bed frame cross member and note their
position in relation to the pivotal point (E) (see figure 4-18 page 4-22). 3
9. Remove the CPR cable from the motor according to the motor model.

10. SKF motor


a. Using the two open-end 10 mm wrenches, loosen the retaining nut of the sheath (B)
and release the CPR cable from the guide on the motor (see figure 4-20 page 4-23)

Figure 4-20. CPR control on the SKF AHS motor 44


C

B 2320_429

5
b. Extract the cable and its pivoting fastener from the release cam (C).
NOTE:
There is a hole in the release cam (C) through which the cable passes. This hole must always
face towards the articulation (centre of the motor) during assembly to prevent retraction during
use.

11. Linak motor


a. Remove the cover (B) using the small screwdriver (see figure 4-21 page 4-23).
b. Pull on the cable and release the CPR cable from the guide on the motor.

Figure 4-21. CPR control on the Linak AHS motor


6
B
C

2320(2)_488 2320(2)_489 7
c. Extract the cable (C).
1. Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 23


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.13 Replacing the CPR Cable
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 12. Removing the Okin motor


a. Pull on the cable and release the CPR cable from the guide on the motor.
b. Using the 7 mm open-end wrench and the N°3 Allen® key, loosen the bolt (x) (see
1

figure 4-22 page 4-24).


c. Remove the washer (y) and extract the end of the cable through the retaining nut of the
sheath (B) and release the CPR cable from the guide on the motor

2
Figure 4-22. CPR control on the Okin AHS motor

3 2320(2)_490

Replacement
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

2. Follow the adjustment procedure below in the event of malfunction.

4 3. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

Adjustment
1. Loosen the nuts of the adjuster (E) using the two 10 mm open-end wrenches.

2. Pull on the cable by hand close to the adjuster (E) in order to take up the play of the CPR
handles and the AHS motor. Tighten the adjuster (E) nuts by hand.

5 NOTE:
The cable must not be tight. Simply take up the play of the CPR handles and the AHS motor.

3. Tighten the nuts using the two 10 mm open end wrenches.

4. Pull gently on each handle to make sure that there is no more play once the screws have been
tightened.

7
1. Allen® is a registered trademark of Industrial Fasteners, Inc.

Page 4 - 24 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.14 Replacing the adjustable thigh section motor
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.14 Replacing the adjustable thigh section motor
Time required: 15 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench
One pair of 6 mm Truarc® cutting pliers
1

2
One small flat screwdriver

Removal
1. Apply the brakes, raise the head section and place the sleep surface, the TS (if possible) and
the FS in the flat position. Place the siderails in the folded and lowered position. Remove the
headboard.
2. Remove the SS and TS hard surfaces (refer to procedure 4.3).

3. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1). 3


4. Remove the power supply unit cover and the cable shield on the central rail (refer to
procedure 4.2).
5. On the main PCB in the power supply unit, disconnect connector “N°5” of the adjustable
thigh section motor (see figure 4-13 page 4-14).
6. Extract the cable from the ATS motor.

7. Remove the Truarc® ring (A) from the pin (B) at the end of the ATS motor shaft using the
44
small screwdriver (see figure 4-23 page 4-25).
NOTE:
Hold the motor and then lower the TS if it could not be put in the flat position.

Figure 4-23. Adjustable thigh section motor

5
A D

B C
6
2320_433 2320_434

8. Hold the ATS motor and remove the Truarc® ring (C) from the pin (D) using the small
screwdriver. Continue to hold the motor and remove the pin.

7
1. Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 25


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.14 Replacing the adjustable thigh section motor
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 Replacement
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the elastic on the new motors is not wound around the motor body
before removing it (cut). If necessary, turn the motor end rod in the appropriate
direction to unwind this elastic. It is used to indicate the correct position of the switches

2 and internal end of travel stops of the motor. If they are incorrectly positioned, the motor
or the bed structure may be damaged.

2. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

7
Page 4 - 26 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.15 Replacing the adjustable foot section motor
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.15 Replacing the adjustable foot section motor
Time required: 20 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench
One pair of 6 mm Truarc® cutting pliers
1

Removal
1. Apply the brakes, raise the head section and the sleep surface and place the TS in the
2
intermediate position. Place the siderails in the folded and lowered position.

2. Remove the headboard and the footboard and then the SS, TS and FS hard surfaces (refer to
procedure 4.3). Remove any accessories that may be present on the foot section.

3. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


4. Remove the power supply unit cover and the cable shield on the central rail (refer to
3
procedure 4.2).
5. On the main PCB in the power supply unit, disconnect connector “N°2” of the adjustable
foot section motor (see figure 4-13 page 4-14).

6. Extract the AFS motor cable from the central rail.

7. Hold the AFS and remove the Truarc® ring (A) from the pin (B) at the end of the AFS motor
shaft (see figure 4-24 page 4-27).
44
Figure 4-24. Adjustable foot section motor

5
D

B
E C

2320_437 2320_436
6
8. Hold the AFS and the AFS motor, remove the pin and retrieve the spacers (C) (see figure 4-
24 page 4-27).

9. Remove the Truarc® ring (clip) (D) from the pin (E) securing the body of the AFS motor

7
and remove the pin and the motor.

10. Place the AFS on the intermediate structure or any other surface on which it can be
supported in the horizontal position.
1. Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 27


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.15 Replacing the adjustable foot section motor
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 Replacement
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the elastic on the new motors is not wound around the motor body
before removing it (cut). If necessary, turn the motor end rod in the appropriate
direction to unwind this elastic. It is used to indicate the correct position of the switches

2 and internal end of travel stops of the motor. If they are incorrectly positioned, the motor
or the bed structure may be damaged.

2. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

7
Page 4 - 28 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.16 Replacing the head HiLow column
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.16 Replacing the head HiLow column
Time required: 40 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench with extension
One elevation tool (P/N: AG0052)

2
One pair of pliers
One T25 Torx® wrench 1

Removal
1. Position the casters in the lengthways direction and apply the brakes.

2. Lower the TS and the FS and raise the HS. Place the siderails in the raised position and
remove the headboard and the footboard.

3. Set the bed to the high position. 3


• Failure when the bed is lowered:
a. Connect the bed to the mains power supply and lock out all the functions, except HL.
b. Press the Raise HL button on the control unit until the foot HL column is fully raised.
NOTE:
If the faulty HL column is disconnected, the other column can still function.
c. Lock out the HL function. 44
d. Clamp the locking pliers to the flat part of the slide (C) (see figure 4-25 page 4-30).

4. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


5. Remove the cover of the power supply unit (refer to procedure 4.2).
6. Release the head chassis covers. Note that it is secured by clips at each end.

7. Note the path of the head column cable, then disconnect the connector “N°6” of the head HL
5
column from the main PCB in the power supply unit and release the head column cable (see
figure 4-13 page 4-14).

8. Disconnect the grounding conductor of the head HL column from the mains input PCB (see
figure 4-12 page 4-14).

CAUGHT HAZARD:
6
The elevation tool must be used in order to remove the column in safety. Failure to do
so could result in injury.

9. Position the elevation tool on the guide arm (A) and adjust the arms to the height of the bed
frame. Raise the arm on the head side of the bed (see figure 4-25 page 4-30).

7
1. Torx® is a registered trademark of Textron, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 29


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.16 Replacing the head HiLow column
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 Figure 4-25. Upper attachment of the head HL column

2
2320_468

3
2320_441

10. Remove the two plugs (F) at the base of the head HL column (see figure 4-28 page 4-33).

11. Using the T25 Torx® wrench, remove the screw (C) securing the grounding cable between
1

the column and the chassis (if present) (see figure 4-26 page 4-30).

12. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, remove the 4 screws (B) securing the base of the column
to the chassis.

4 Figure 4-26. Lower attachment of the head HL column

5
B
C

2320(2)_457

6 13. Raise the bed frame/Col-H assembly using the elevation tool until it reaches the horizontal
position by pushing the lower part of the column towards the interior.

14. Remove the locking pliers if present.

15. Make sure that the bed frame is securely placed at the right height, then slide the column
towards the head of the bed in order to release it from the guide rails (A) on the bed frame,
then extract from the bed. Note that the column power cable comes out on the power supply

7 unit side (see figure 4-25 page 4-30).

1. Torx® is a registered trademark of Textron, Inc.

Page 4 - 30 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.16 Replacing the head HiLow column
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
Replacement
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
The ground conductor and the grounding spring leaves must be correctly installed to
establish the equipotential ground connection of the metal parts. Technical staff and
caregivers may be injured if the installation is incorrect and/or continuity is not
established.

1. Remove the two plugs (F) at the base of the new column (see figure 4-28 page 4-33).

2. Install the guides on the pins at the top of the Col-H and position the Col-H in the rails.
2
3. Connect the Col-H connector to connector “N°6” on the main PCB and the grounding
conductor (E) to the terminal on the power supply unit (see figure 4-13 page 4-14).
NOTE:
Leave as much slack as possible for the head column cable between the head column and the
power supply unit.

4. Connect the bed to the mains power supply and lock out all the functions, except HL.
3
5. Using the control unit, raise the HL until the lower part of the column reaches the chassis.

6. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


7. Secure the base of the Col-H to the chassis using the four screws (B) (see figure 4-26 page
4-30).
NOTE:
44
If the chassis cross member does not have any holes for the grounding cable, drill a 4.5 mm
diameter hole in the middle of the cross member as shown in figure 4-26 page 4-30.

8. Secure the grounding cable between the column and the chassis using the screw (C).

9. Install the two connector plugs (F) at the base of the new column (see figure 4-28 page
4-33).

10. Place the bed in the Trendelenburg position in order to make sure that the power cable of the
5
column is not pulled too tight during the movement. If necessary, adjust the cable slack in
relation to the power supply unit.

11. Install the cover of the power supply unit (refer to procedure 4.2).
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
The ground conductor and the grounding spring leaves must be correctly installed to
establish the equipotential ground connection of the metal parts. Technical staff and
6
caregivers may be injured if the installation is incorrect and/or continuity is not
established.

12. Check the continuity with the ground of the accessible metal parts (see “Grounding
resistance” on page 6-4 of the preventive maintenance programme).

13. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual. 7


AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 31
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.17 Replacing the foot HiLow column
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.17 Replacing the foot HiLow column


Time required: 40 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench with extension
One elevation tool (P/N: : AG0052)

2
One T25 Torx® wrench 1

One pair of pliers


One small flat screwdriver

Removal
1. Position the casters in the lengthways direction and apply the brakes.

2. Raise the TS and the FS and lower the HS. Place the siderails in the raised, folded position

3 and remove the footboard. Place the foot siderails in the lowered position.

3. Remove the TS and FS hard surfaces (refer to procedure 4.3) then remove the linen holder if
present.

4. Set the bed to the high position.


• Failure when the bed is lowered:

4 a. Connect the bed to the mains power supply and lock out all the functions, except HL.
b. Press the Raise HL button on the control unit until the head HL column is fully raised.
NOTE:
If the faulty HL column is disconnected, the other column can still function.
c. Lock out the HL function.

5. Release the foot chassis covers. Note that it is secured by clips at each end (see figure 4-32

5 page 4-38).

6. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).

7. Remove the cable shield from the central rail (A) of the sleep surface at the foot end of the
bed. Note the path of the foot HL column cable and disconnect it from connector (B) (see
figure 4-27 page 4-33).

7
1. Torx® is a registered trademark of Textron, Inc.

Page 4 - 32 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.17 Replacing the foot HiLow column
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
Figure 4-27. Foot HL column connection

3
2320_442

8. Remove the two plugs (F) from the cable(s) at the base of the head HL column (one cable
for the brake indicator switch (G) and two cables for the HL pedals (H)) and disconnect the

44
corresponding cable(s) (see figure 4-28 page 4-33).

9. Using the T25 Torx® wrench, remove the screw (P) securing the grounding cable between
1

the column and the chassis (if present) (see figure 4-26 page 4-30).

Figure 4-28. Foot HL column base

G
5
F

H
2320(2)_443 2320(2)_444

10. Open the ducts under the longitudinal tubes on the chassis and release the cables.
6
CAUGHT HAZARD:
The elevation tool must be used in order to remove the column in safety. Failure to do
so could result in injury.

11. Position the elevation tool and set the height so that the arm (I) supports the foot cross
member (J) of the bed frame (see figure 4-29 page 4-34).
7
1. Torx® is a registered trademark of Textron, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 33


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.17 Replacing the foot HiLow column
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 CAUGHT HAZARD:
The bed frame must always be secured lengthways to keep it in the rail on the head
end HL column. Failure to do so could result in injury.

12. Clamp the locking pliers to the flat part of the head slide (O).

13. Make sure that the bed frame is secured in the lengthways direction by the arm (I) of the
2 elevation tool that secures it to the cross member.

Figure 4-29. Securing and holding the foot section

I
4 J
2320_467

2320_445

14. For beds fitted with Ø 125 mm casters, remove the Starlock ring (Q) and the stop (R) (see

5
figure 4-30 page 4-34).

Figure 4-30. Foot column stop (bed with Ø 125 mm casters)

R
Q

7 2320(2)_477

Page 4 - 34 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.17 Replacing the foot HiLow column
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
15. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, remove the 4 screws (K) securing the base of the column
(see figure 4-31 page 4-35).

Figure 4-31. Foot HiLow column

M M

S T
2
U S
K K

2320(2)_446
3
16. Retrieve the brake contact assembly (L).

17. Raise the bed frame/column assembly using the elevation tool until it reaches the horizontal
position by pushing the lower part of the column towards the interior.

18. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, remove the 4 screws (M) from either side of the column
(see figure 4-31 page 4-35).

19. Extract the column from the bed by sliding it in the guide rails.
44
Replacement
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
The ground conductor and the grounding spring leaves must be correctly installed to
establish the equipotential ground connection of the metal parts. Technical staff and
caregivers may be injured if the installation is incorrect and/or continuity is not
established.
5
1. Remove the two plugs (F) at the base of the new column (see figure 4-28 page 4-33).

2. Using the T25 Torx® wrench, remove the screws (S) securing the cover (U) of the column
1

and the screw (T) securing the grounding cables (see figure 4-26 page 4-30). Remove the
cover and then the grounding cable that connects the head column to the power supply unit.

3. Install the cover (U) and secure with the screws (S).
6
4. Secure the interior grounding cable using the screw (T).

5. Install the guides on the pins at the top of the column and position the column in the rails.

6. Secure the top of the column using the four screws (M).

7
1. Torx® is a registered trademark of Textron, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 35


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.17 Replacing the foot HiLow column
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 7. Connect the column to connector (B) (see figure 4-27 page 4-33).

8. Connect the bed to the mains power supply and lock out all the functions, except HL.

9. Using the control unit, raise the HL until the lower part of the column reaches the chassis.

10. Secure the brake contact assembly (L) and the column with the screw (K) (see figure 4-31
page 4-35).

2 11. Secure the base of the column using the three other screws (K).

12. Install the stops (R) and rings (Q).

13. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).

14. Remove the elevation tool.

3 15. Disconnect the foot HL column cable from connector (B).

16. Pass the column cable along the initial path in the rail (A) and connect it to connector (B).

17. Connect the bed to the mains power supply and lock out all the functions, except HL.
NOTE:
Leave as much slack as possible for the HL column cable between the column and the bed
frame.

4 18. Place the bed in the Trendelenburg position in order to make sure that the power cable of the
column is not pulled too tight during the movement. Adjust the cable slack if necessary.

19. Close the rail (A) with the cable shield.

20. Install the two plugs (F) (see figure 4-28 page 4-33).

5
21. Secure the grounding cable between the column and the chassis using the screw (P).
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
The ground conductor and the grounding spring leaves must be correctly installed to
establish the equipotential ground connection of the metal parts. Technical staff and
caregivers may be injured if the installation is incorrect and/or continuity is not
established.

6
22. Check the continuity with the ground of the accessible metal parts (see “Grounding
resistance” on page 6-4 of the preventive maintenance programme).

23. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

7
Page 4 - 36 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.18 Replacing the HiLow* pedal or the foot-operated control*
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.18 Replacing the HiLow* pedal or the foot-operated control*
Time required: 15 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:Yes
Tools required: One small flat screwdriver
One 13 mm ratchet wrench

Removal
NOTE:
2
The two pedals are independent. This procedure applies to both pedals.

1. Apply the brakes. Unfold the siderails and put them in the raised position. Place the TS and
the FS in the horizontal position and the bed in the raised position.

3
2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).
3. Release the foot chassis covers. Note that it is secured by clips at each end (see figure 4-32
page 4-38).

4. Remove the connector plug (F) on the column of the pedal to be removed (see figure 4-28
page 4-33).

5. Extract the pedal cable from the duct.

6. Disconnect the pedal cable from the base of the foot HL column. 44
7. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, partially loosen the bolt securing the pedal to the chassis,
then slide the pedal in order to extract it from the chassis.

Replacement
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.
2. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual. 5

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 37
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.19 Replacing the bed brake detection contact subassembly
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.19 Replacing the bed brake detection contact subassembly


Time required: 15 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:Yes
Tools required: One small flat screwdriver
One 13 mm ratchet wrench

2 Removal
1. Apply the brakes. Unfold the siderails and put them in the raised position. Place the TS and
the FS in the horizontal position and the bed in the raised position.

2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


3. Release the foot chassis covers. Note that it is secured by clips on each side (see figure 4-32

3 page 4-38).

Figure 4-32. Brake detection contact

4 C

5 A
2320(2)_447

4. Remove the connector plug (F) on the foot HL column on the contact side and remove and
disconnect the contact cable (G) (see figure 4-28 page 4-33).

5. Extract the brake contact cable from the duct.

6 6. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, unscrew and remove the screw (B) securing the contact
(C) to the chassis.
NOTE:
The two wires are connected to the exterior terminals of the contact (terminals 1 and 2: NC
contact).

Replacement
7 1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

2. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

Page 4 - 38 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.20 Replacing the brake/steer bar
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.20 Replacing the brake/steer bar
Time required: 40 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench
One 10 mm Allen® key 1

2
One T25 Torx® wrench (if the 5th wheel is present)
2

One 8 mm pin punch


One small flat screwdriver
One soft faced hammer
One elevation tool (P/N: : AG0052)
NOTE:
When replacing the brake/steer bar, the two rings linking the brake bar, the link bar and the
hexagonal brake bar at the head of the bed must be broken and replaced.
NOTE:
The brake bar belongs to a kit that also includes the head hexagonal bar and the plastic
3
articulation rings.

Removal
1. Place the sleep surface at mid-height and put the TS and the FS in the horizontal position.

44
Place the siderails in the folded and raised position.

2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


3. Release the head and foot chassis covers. Note that the cover is secured by clips on each side
(see figure 4-32 page 4-38).

CAUTION:

5
If the bed cannot be raised to mid-height for any reason, the arms of the elevation tool
must not reach the motors when they are positioned. Disregarding this precaution may
break the AHS and AFS motors.

WARNING:
Do not raise the complete bed using the lifting tool. The maximum raised load is
150 kg. Disregarding this precaution may cause the lifting mechanism to break and
result in injury.

7
1. Allen® is a registered trademark of Industrial Fasteners, Inc.
2. Torx® is a registered trademark of Textron, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 39


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.20 Replacing the brake/steer bar
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4. Position the arm of the elevation tool under the right-hand side of the chassis.

Figure 4-33. Retracting the brake bar

3 5. Remove the bed brake detection contact (J) by removing the screw (K).
2320_448

6. For beds fitted with the 5th wheel only: Using the T25 Torx® wrench, remove the screw (A)
1

securing the stop (B) of the brake bar (see figure 4-34 page 4-40).

7. For bed fitted with a controlled-operation 5th wheel only, remove the release mechanism at

4 the head end.

Figure 4-34. Brake bar stop

5 J

C
6 D

I 2320_449

8. Adjust the elevation tool to raise the chassis by a few centimetres.

9. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, remove the four screws (C) and two bolts (D) securing the

7 head and foot casters on the right-hand side of the chassis.

1. Torx® is a registered trademark of Textron, Inc.

Page 4 - 40 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.20 Replacing the brake/steer bar
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
10. Set the brake bar (E) to the neutral position (horizontal) (see figure 4-35 page 4-41).

Figure 4-35. Brakes

2
F

E
E 3
G

H
2320_416

11. Extract the caster and support assemblies (I) using the soft-faced hammer if necessary (see
44
figure 4-34 page 4-40).
NOTE:
Do not turn the casters in their sockets in order to keep the same adjustments.

5
12. Drive the brake bar (E) and the hexagonal head bar (F) to the right of the bed (as seen by the
patient) using the soft faced hammer and the 8 mm pin punch (head end) (see figure 4-35
page 4-41).
NOTE:
The plastic articulation rings (H) will be damaged during this step and must therefore be
replaced.

13. Remove the link bar (G) from the right-hand side member of the chassis.

14. Remove any parts of the plastic articulation rings (H) remaining on the brake bar and the
hexagonal head bar using the soft faced hammer and the small flat screwdriver.
6

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 41
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.20 Replacing the brake/steer bar
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 Replacement
1. Insert the new articulation rings (H) in the openings provided in the link bar (G) (see figure
4-35 page 4-41).

2. Perform steps 11 to 13 of the removal procedure in reverse order.

3. Set the brake bar to the brake position and check that the brakes are applied to all four

2 casters.

4. If the brakes are not applied:


a. Set the brake bar to the neutral position.
b. Remove the caster base.
CAUTION:
Make sure that you turn the entire caster through one half turn and not just the lower

3 section of the caster.


c. Turn through one half turn with the shaft of the caster, then raise the base and the
hexagonal bar.
5. Perform steps 1 to 9 of the removal procedure in reverse order.

6. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

7
Page 4 - 42 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.21 Replacing the caster, the brake caster and the steering caster
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.21 Replacing the caster, the brake caster and the steering caster
Time required: 15 min (without adjustment)
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench
One 10 mm Allen® key 1

2
One soft faced hammer
One medium-sized flat screwdriver
One elevation tool (P/N: : AG0052)
NOTE:
When ordering a caster from a Hill-Rom spare parts service, remember that the bed may be
fitted with the antistatic caster and/or foot steering caster options (see “Casters” on page 3-10).
NOTE:
If the bed is fitted with a self-steering 5th wheel option (see “Casters” on page 3-10), the brake
bar is limited by a stop and only works in two positions: neutral or brakes. Take account of this
information when installing the casters (see figure 4-34 page 4-40).
3
NOTE:
Check the position of each type of caster on the bed (see figure 5-2 page 5-4).

Removal
1. Lock the bed in the mid-height position, with the HS, TS and FS flat in the horizontal
position and the siderails raised. Remove the headboard. 44
2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).
3. Release the foot and head chassis covers, depending on the caster to be replaced. Note that it
is secured by clips on each side (see figure 4-32 page 4-38).
WARNING:
Do not raise the complete bed using the lifting tool. The maximum raised load is
150 kg. Disregarding this precaution may cause the lifting mechanism to break and
result in injury.
5
CAUTION:
If the bed cannot be raised to mid-height for any reason, the arms of the elevation tool
must not reach the motors when they are positioned. Disregarding this precaution may
break the AHS and AFS motors.

7
1. Allen® is a registered trademark of Industrial Fasteners, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 43


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.21 Replacing the caster, the brake caster and the steering caster
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4. Place the elevation tool under the head cross member of the bed (when replacing a caster at
the head end) (see figure 4-36 page 4-44) or under one of the sides of the chassis (when
replacing a caster at the foot end) (see figure 4-33 page 4-40) and adjust so that the casters
rise a few centimetres.

Figure 4-36. Caster attachment

2
A

C
3
2320_463 2320_464

5. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, remove the 2 screws (A) and the bolt (B) securing the

4 caster to be removed (see figure 4-36 page 4-44).

6. Set the brake bar to the neutral position.

7. Remove the caster and its socket (C), possibly by using the soft faced hammer.

8. Remove the caster from its socket.

Replacement
5 1. Before installing the new caster, set the brake bar to the brake position, then the steer
position. Note the direction of rotation of the hexagonal bar when moving from one position
to the other, then reset the brake bar to neutral.

2. Insert the new caster in the socket.


NOTE:
The caster has three positions as follows:

6 • Braking caster: two neutral positions and one brake position,


• Steering caster: one steer position, then neutral then brake.
CAUTION:
Ensure the caster is correctly positioned with respect to the movements of the
hexagonal bar. Disregarding this precaution may cause the brake and steer system to
malfunction.

7
Page 4 - 44 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.21 Replacing the caster, the brake caster and the steering caster
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
3. Position the socket in its location on the chassis then, using the 10 mm Allen® key, which 1

you insert into the caster instead of the hexagonal bar, set the caster to brake position, then
the steer position by rotating it in one direction or the other. Note the direction of operation
with respect to the hexagonal bar of the bed and turn the body of the caster in the socket so
that the operating movements coincide.

4. Remove the 10 mm Allen® key, then fit the socket in its housing on the chassis by inserting
it into the upper opening of the caster in the hexagonal bar (head end of bed) or the brake bar
(foot end).

5. Set the brake bar to brake position and check that the new caster is braked.
2
6. If the brakes are not applied:
a. Set the brake bar to the neutral position.
b. Remove the caster base.
CAUTION:
Make sure that you turn the entire caster through one half turn and not just the lower
section of the caster.
3
c. Turn through one half turn with the shaft of the caster, then raise the base and the
hexagonal bar.
7. Perform steps 1 to 5 of the removal procedure of the caster in reverse order.

8. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

Adjusting the brakes: single and double band casters


44
Time required: 10 min per caster
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench
One 10 mm Allen® key
5
2

One soft faced hammer


One medium-sized flat screwdriver
Loctite® 242 adhesive
3

One elevation tool (P/N: : AG0052)

Procedure

1. Perform steps 1 to 5 of the caster removal procedure.

NOTE:
6
The braking adjustment is defined in the caster brake position by the number of turns made on
this caster from the first point of contact between the band and the braking system. The number
of half-turns depends on the type of caster.

1. Allen® is a registered trademark of Industrial Fasteners, Inc.


7
2. Allen® is a registered trademark of Industrial Fasteners, Inc.
3. Loctite® is a registered trademark of Loctite Corporation.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 45


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.21 Replacing the caster, the brake caster and the steering caster
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 CAUTION:
Double band caster: it is very important to stop turning the body of the caster when the
brakes are no longer applied.

2. Turn the caster body anti-clockwise (as viewed from above) through successive half-turns
until the caster is no longer braked.

2
3. Turn the caster body clockwise (viewed from above) by successive half-turns until the first
point of contact between the band and the braking system.
4. Double band caster: if the double band caster body has been loosened too much, it may be
impossible to adjust it. In this case perform the following:
a. Unclip and remove the upper cover (C) with the small flat screwdriver. Place the
adhesive tape (D) around the shaft of the caster to lock the two outer parts (see figure 4-
37 page 4-46).

3
b. Unclip the lower cover (E) of the caster with a screwdriver to be inserted at each side
of the caster between the bands.
c. Lift and remove the caster cover.
d. Position the 10 mm open end wrench on the central shaft of the caster, with the brakes
still applied, then turn the caster body clockwise (as viewed from above), until the
brakes start to be applied to the bands.
e. Install the caster covers.

4 Figure 4-37. Caster

5 D

6 5. Turn the caster body as follows:


2320_466

a. Non-antistatic single band caster: four half-turns clockwise (as viewed from above).
b. Antistatic single band caster: three half-turns clockwise (as viewed from above).
c. Antistatic and non-antistatic double band casters: three half-turns clockwise (as viewed
from above).

7 6. Install the two retaining screws of the caster and tighten them with the 13 mm ratchet
wrench.

Page 4 - 46 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.21 Replacing the caster, the brake caster and the steering caster
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
NOTE:
Apply some Loctite® medium thread 242 to the two retaining screws of the caster to lock
1

securely (when adjusting only).


7. Lower the elevation tool until the bed rests on the casters.
8. Apply the brakes and check the brakes by pushing the bed along a level floor with a force of
200 Newtons. The bed must not move.
Adjusting the steering caster
The steering system of the casters does not require any special adjustments. Simply check the
position of the casters when installing and check the brakes. Please refer to the replacement and
2
adjustment sections of this procedure.

Enlever la page du point 4.22 Remplacement système autodirectionnel 5è roue

44

7
1. Loctite® is a registered trademark of Loctite Corporation.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 47


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.22 Replacement of the 5th wheel with controlled operation
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.22 Replacement of the 5th wheel with controlled operation


Time required: 20 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench
One elevation tool

2
One small screwdriver
One 10 mm open end wrench

Removal
1. Lock the bed in the mid-height position with the HS, TS and FS flat in the horizontal
position. Raise the siderails and remove the headboard.

2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).

3 WARNING:
Do not raise the complete bed using the lifting tool. The maximum raised load is
150 kg. Disregarding this precaution may cause the lifting mechanism to break.

3. Place the elevation tool under the head cross member and adjust until the casters rise by
about 13 centimetres (see figure 4-36 page 4-44).

4
4. Open the duct (C) and extract the cable (D) (see figure 4-38 page 4-48).

5. Using the open-end wrench and the 13 mm ratchet wrench, unscrew the two bolts (A)
securing the 5th wheel steering system (B ) and extract the assembly. Retrieve the two bolts
(A).

Figure 4-38. 5th wheel with controlled operation

7
2320(2)_479

6. Release the head chassis covers. Note that it is secured by clips on each side (see figure 4-32
page 4-38).

Page 4 - 48 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.22 Replacement of the 5th wheel with controlled operation
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
7. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, remove the 2 screws (E) and the bolt (F) securing the
caster to be removed (see figure 4-39 page 4-49).

8. Remove the spacer (G) and the mechanism (H).

Figure 4-39. Release mechanism

2
H

E
I
F

3
2320(2)_478

Replacement

44
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

2. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

Adjustment
1. Using the 10 mm open end wrench, loosen the nut (I).

2. Adjust the tension of the cable so that:


• The 5th wheel locks correctly in the steering position.
• The 5th wheel locks correctly in the free position.
5
3. Lock the nut.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 49
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.23 Replacing the adjustable head section dampers
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.23 Replacing the adjustable head section dampers


Time required: 15 min per damper
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench
One small flat screwdriver

2
One pair of 6 mm Truarc® cutting pliers
1

One pair of multi-grip pliers


One soft faced hammer
One 27 mm open end wrench
One T25 Torx® wrench 2

NOTE:
The bed is fitted with two AHS dampers. It is advisable to replace them in pairs for reasons of
load distribution.
3 Removal
1. Apply the brakes and place the bed in the raised position.

2. Remove the siderails (refer to procedure 4.25).

3. Remove the hard surface of the head section (refer to procedure 4.4)

4 4. Raise the head section to the high position.

5. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


6. Remove the hard surface of the seat section (refer to procedure 4.3).

7. Remove the stops (A) using the multi-grip pliers (see figure 4-40 page 4-50).

8. Remove the Truarc® ring (B) using the small screwdriver, then remove the pin (C) and let
5 the AHS motor descend.

9. Using the Philips head screwdriver, remove the screw (H) that secures the grounding braid
to the head section.

Figure 4-40. Adjustable head section stops and AHS motor shaft

6
H

A B

7 2320_450
C 2320_451

1. Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.


2. Torx® is a registered trademark of Textron, Inc.

Page 4 - 50 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.23 Replacing the adjustable head section dampers
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
10. Slide the AHS rods (D) (see figure 4-41 page 4-51) in order to release the pins (E) (see
figure 4-43 page 4-52) by tapping the base of the flat part of the rod with the soft-faced
hammer.

Figure 4-41. Adjustable head section rod

D
2

3
2320_452

11. Turn the head end rods (see figure 4-42 page 4-51).

12. Slide the AHS structure towards the head end, while holding it in the raised position.

13. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, unscrew the retaining screw (F) on each damper (G) (see
figure 4-42 page 4-51).

F
Figure 4-42. AHS damper with guide

G
44
F

5
2320_453

14. Remove the dampers (G) from their housing.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 51
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.23 Replacing the adjustable head section dampers
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 Replacement
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.
NOTE:
When installing the rods (D) on the pins (E) of the AHS structure, use the 27 mm open-end
wrench and the soft-faced hammer (see figure 4-43 page 4-52).

2
Figure 4-43. Installing the adjustable head section rod

3
D

2320_454

4 2. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

7
Page 4 - 52 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.24 Replace the gas-powered actuator and cable subassembly and the mechanical AFS duct.
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.24 Replace the gas-powered actuator and cable subassembly and the
mechanical AFS duct.
NOTE:
Only the complete subassembly is available as a spare part. It is delivered assembled and
adjusted.
Time required: 20 min

2
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One T25 Torx® wrench
1

One small flat screwdriver


One pair of 6 mm Truarc® cutting pliers
2

NOTE:
The bed only has one release handle that is on the right-hand side, as seen by the patient.

Removal 3
1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the sleep surface and the different sections in the
horizontal position. Fold away the foot siderail.

2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


3. Remove the TS and FS hard surfaces (refer to procedure 4.3).

4. Place a support under the foot of the bed frame in order to set it to the correct height. 44
5. Using the T25 Torx® wrench, loosen the two screws (A) securing the control handle
subassembly (B) (see figure 4-44 page 4-53).

Figure 4-44. Power-driven AFS control

5
B

A 6
2320_423

7
1. Torx® is a registered trademark of Textron, Inc.
2. Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 53


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.24 Replace the gas-powered actuator and cable subassembly and the mechanical AFS duct.
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 6. Using the small screwdriver, remove the Truarc® ring (D) from the pin (E) at the end of the
1

actuator, then remove the pin (E) by releasing the foot of the bed frame and retrieve the two
spacers (F) (see figure 4-45 page 4-54).

Figure 4-45. Power-driven adjustable foot section actuator


D
I

2 G
H

E
3 2320_456

7. Using the small screwdriver, remove the Truarc® ring (G) from the pin (H) at the base of the
actuator, then remove the pin (H).

Replacement

4 1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

2. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

Adjustment
Tools required: One 6 mm open end wrench
One 8 mm open end wrench
One 17 mm open end wrench

5 NOTE:
The system is delivered assembled and adjusted. However, adjustments may be necessary
during use if play is detected in the release handle (C). The adjustments are made on the control
handle subassembly (B) (see figure 4-44 page 4-53).
1. Check that the cable is correctly positioned in relation to the actuator release head (I) (see
figure 4-45 page 4-54).
2. Using the 17 mm open-end wrench, check that the counter nut is securely tightened on the
6 actuator release head (I).
3. Using the 6 and 8 mm open-end wrenches, loosen the adjuster on the control handle
subassembly (B) (see figure 4-44 page 4-53).
4. Tighten the adjuster again to compensate for the slack in the cable.

NOTE:
The cable must not be taut.
7 5. Using the 6 and 8 mm open-end wrenches, tighten and lock the adjuster on the control
handle subassembly (B).

1. Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.

Page 4 - 54 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.25 Replacing head siderail and TotalGuard™elevation arm subassembly
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.25 Replacing head siderail and TotalGuard™elevation arm subassembly
Time required: 20 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:Yes
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench

Removal
1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the sleep surface and the different sections in the
horizontal position.
2
2. Raise and lock the head siderails with the foot siderails folded away.
3. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).
4. Hold the siderail, press the release button (A) and extract the foot siderail (see figure 4-50
page 4-58).
5. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, unscrew and remove the four screws (B) retaining the head
3
siderail support and retrieve the spacers (C) (see figure 4-46 page 4-55).
NOTE:
For greater ease of removal, the siderail support is mounted so that it remains secure on the
AHS structure, even when the four screws are removed.

Figure 4-46. Head siderail attachment


44
B B

5
C
C
2320_458

NOTE:
Photo without the head section surface for greater clarity.
6. Slightly tilt the head siderail and support assembly towards the middle of the bed and
6
extract.

Replacement
1. Place the head siderail in the raised position in relation to the support and position the head
siderail and support assembly on the adjustable head section structure.
2. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order. 7
3. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 55


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.26 Replacing a central elevation arm
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.26 Replacing a central elevation arm


Time required: 10 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:Yes
Tools required: One small screwdriver

Removal
2 1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the sleep surface and the different sections in the
horizontal position.
2. Raise and lock the head siderails with the foot siderails folded away.
3. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).
4. Hold the siderail, press the release button (A) and extract the foot siderail (see figure 4-50

3 page 4-58).
5. Take off the inner cover (B) and remove the release mechanism (C).

Figure 4-47.

4 C

5 2320(2)_470

6. Extract the duct (D) from the stop, take out the runner control button (E) and remove the
control button cable (F).

Figure 4-48.

7 D
2320(2)_471 2320(2)_472 2320(2)_473
E F

Page 4 - 56 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.26 Replacing a central elevation arm
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
7. Remove the circlips (G) and the upper pin (H) of the central arm (I) and take out the siderail
panel cable.

8. Rest the siderail on the bed frame.

9. Remove the circlips (J) then the lower pin (K) of the central arm.

Figure 4-49.

I
2
G

3
2320(2)_474 2320(2)_475
H K J I 2320(2)_476

Replacement
10. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.
44
11. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

2320(2)_469
5

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 57
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.27 Replacing a TotalGuard™ foot siderail
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.27 Replacing a TotalGuard™ foot siderail


Time required: 5 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:Yes
Tools required: None

Removal
2 1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the sleep surface and the different sections in the
horizontal position.

2. Lift the siderail to the raised position.


CAUTION:
Disregarding this precaution may cause the siderail articulation to break during

3 removal.

3. Place the foot siderail in the folded position.

4. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


5. Press the middle button (A) on the foot siderail while holding the other end, then remove
(see figure 4-50 page 4-58).

4 Figure 4-50. Foot siderail in folded position

5
2320_460

Replacement

6 1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.


CAUTION:
The foot siderail must always be installed in the folded position. Failure to follow this
recommendation could result in equipment damage.

2. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

7
Page 4 - 58 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.28 Replacing a TotalGuard™ foot siderail support
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.28 Replacing a TotalGuard™ foot siderail support
Time required: 10 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench

Removal
1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the sleep surface in the horizontal position and the
TS and FS raised.
2
2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).
3. Place the foot siderail in the folded position.

3
4. Remove the TS and FS hard surfaces (refer to procedure 4.3).

5. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, remove the 2 screws (A) securing the siderail support and
extract the assembly (see figure 4-51 page 4-59).

Figure 4-51. Foot siderail support

44

2320_459
5
Replacement
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

2. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.


6

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 59
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.29 Replacing the long metal siderail supports
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.29 Replacing the long metal siderail supports


Time required: 20 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:Yes
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench

Removal
2 1. Apply the brakes, place the bed in the raised position and raise the different sections and
lower the siderails.
2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).
3. Remove the siderails (see figure 4-52 page 4-60).

Figure 4-52. Removing a metal siderail

4 2320(2)_481 2320(2)_482

4. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, remove the screw (A) securing the grounding braid (see
figure 4-53 page 4-60).

5. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, loosen and remove the two bolts (B) and (C) securing the

5
head and foot supports.

Figure 4-53. Head and foot supports for metal siderails

A
C

6
B
B

2320(2)_480 2320(2)_483

7 Replacement
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.
2. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

Page 4 - 60 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.30 Replacing the foot and headboards
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.30 Replacing the foot and headboards
Time required: 5 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:Yes
Tools required: No tools are required to perform this operation.

Removal
Two cases are possible:
• If the head and footboards are not locked, then simply raise them vertically to extract them
2
from their housing.
• If the footboard can be locked, loosen the two knobs then lift the endboard vertically.

Replacement
Install by inserting the two chrome-plated guides on each siderail in the sockets provided in the
bed frame. 3

44

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 61
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.31 Replacing the supports for wooden footboards or lockable plastic endboards*
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.31 Replacing the supports for wooden footboards or lockable plastic


endboards*
Time required: 5 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:Yes
Tools required: One small flat screwdriver

2 Removal
One Philips head screwdriver

1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the TS and FS in the horizontal position.

2. Remove the footboard.


NOTE:

3 This procedure is applicable to the following cases:


• Bed with wooden endboard and extension,
• Bed with lockable plastic footboard.
3. Insert the Philips head screwdriver in the lower hole (A) in the support and the small
screwdriver in the groove (B) in the upper nut (see figure 4-54 page 4-62).

4
Figure 4-54. Footboard support

5
B

2320(2)_484 2320(2)_485

6 Replacement
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

2. Check that the endboard slides freely from the retracted to the extended position.

7
Page 4 - 62 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.32 Replacing the linen holder table*
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts
4.32 Replacing the linen holder table*
Time required: 5 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:Yes
Tools required: No tools are required to perform this operation.

Removing the tablet from a bed with plastic endboards


1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the TS and FS in the horizontal position. 2
2. Remove the footboard.

3. Extend the linen holder then tilt it upwards to release it from the two guides and pull towards
you to extract it from the bed.

Removing the tablet from a bed with wooden endboards


1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the TS and FS in the horizontal position.
3
2. Remove the footboard.

3. Remove the two endboard supports (see procedure 4.31 page 4-62).

4. Pull the tablet towards you to extract it from the bed.

Replacement 44
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

2. Check that the endboard slides freely from the retracted to the extended position.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 63
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.33 Replacing the extension*
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.33 Replacing the extension*


Time required: 10 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench
Medical Vaseline

2 Removal
1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the TS and FS flat, remove the footboard and
remove the FS hard surface (refer to procedure 4.3).
2. Push the extension in and extract the linen holder tablet (refer to procedure 4.32).

3. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).

3 4. While holding the extension, use the 13 mm ratchet wrench to loosen and extract the two
screws (A) retaining the extension (see figure 4-55 page 4-64).
Figure 4-55. Extension attachment

4
A

5 2320_425

5. Lift the end of the extension without actuating the control handle, then extract the extension
and guide rail assembly from the support notches (B) in the bed (see figure 4-55 page 4-64).
NOTE:
The two runners are installed with medical Vaseline (see “Tool and supply requirements” page

6 4-1). Two of the sliding shoes of the extension are fitted with leaf springs that ground the
extension.

7
Page 4 - 64 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008

Replacement
1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:
The ground conductor and the grounding spring leaves must be correctly installed to
establish the equipotential ground connection of the metal parts. Technical staff and
caregivers may be injured if the installation is incorrect and/or continuity is not
established.

2. Check the continuity with the ground of the accessible metal parts (see “Grounding
2
resistance” on page 6-4 of the preventive maintenance programme).

3. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

44

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 4 - 65
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
4.34 Replacing the egress handle*
Chapter 4: Procedures for the removal, replacement and adjustment of parts

1 4.34 Replacing the egress handle*


Time required: 10 min
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:No
Tools required: One 13 mm ratchet wrench

Removal
2 1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the HS, TS and FS flat in the horizontal position.
Fold away the foot siderails.

2. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


3. Remove the FS hard surface (refer to procedure 4.3).

3
4. Using the 13 mm ratchet wrench, loosen the two screws (A) supporting the egress handle
(B). Extract the assembly from the bed (see figure 4-56 page 4-66).

Figure 4-56. Attachment of the egress handle

4 B B
A

5 Replacement
2320(2)_486 2320(2)_487

1. Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

2. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

7
Page 4 - 66 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008

Chapter 5
Spare parts
Ordering spare parts

2
Use the parts list in this manual to identify the part numbers of the parts you need. Find the
product number and serial number on the product identification label (A) (see figure 5-1 page
5-1).
Figure 5-1. Product identification label location

2320A_500
55
WARNING:
Do not remove the identification label from the bed. The information on the label is
essential in order to identify the bed and guarantee that maintenance operations can
be performed in safety. Disregarding this caution may compromise the safety of the
patient or users.
Call the after-sales service of your national Hill-Rom representative (refer to the last page of
this manual). Always have the following information at hand when calling in order to speed up
6
order processing:
• Customer account number
• Purchase order number (if available)
• Product code
• Serial number of the bed
• Part reference number(s)
7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 1
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Exchange Policy
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 For your convenience, a fax number is available for ordering parts, requesting prices or chasing
up an order.
Postage will be invoiced for any orders of less than 50 Euros.
Please address all orders to your national Hill-Rom representative to the attention of the spares
department (refer to the last page of this manual).
NOTE:
All the kits contain their respective fixing systems as well any applicable adhesive labels.
2 Exchange Policy
The conditions specified below apply to any exchange carried out by Hill-Rom during the in-
warranty period and out-of-warranty period.

In-warranty exchanges

3
Hill-Rom may request that certain defective products or parts be returned for assessment. You
will then be held liable for responding with the 30 days following reception of the spare parts or
products. By default, Hill-Rom will invoice the full price of these parts or products.
NOTE:
This invoicing principle applies exclusively to the parts or products for which Hill-Rom has
requested the return.
In certain cases, the invoice sent with the parts will show the full sale price of the parts (for

4
internal Hill-Rom use only). Do not mix up this price with the price you have to pay.
NOTE:
Opening any electrical parts results in the loss of the warranty.

Out-of-warranty exchanges
Not applicable.

7
Page 5 - 2 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Recommended spares
Chapter 5: Spare parts

Recommended spares
List of recommended spare parts for 10 beds AvantGuard® and for three years, see table 5-1
page 5-3.
Table 5-1. Recommended spare parts

Part
Quantity Description

2
number
AG0083 1 LI158Bx Control pendant (patient)
AG0084 1 LI158Bx Control pendant (caregiver)
AG0085 1 Control pendant (patient) + EasyChair®
AG0086 1 Control pendant (caregiver) + EasyChair®
AG0087 1 Left-hand lateral caregiver unit without “Shock”
function
AG0088
AG0089
1
1
Left-hand lateral caregiver unit with “Shock” function
Right-hand lateral caregiver unit without “Shock”
3
function
AG0090 1 Right-hand lateral caregiver unit with “Shock”
function
AG0015 1 Standard power cable, Europe
AG0016 1 Power cable, UK
AG0017
AG0121
1
2
Power cable, Switzerland
Power supply unit
4
AG16113 1 HiLow column (40/80 cm)
AG16110 1 HiLow column (45/85 cm)
AG0116 1 Adjustable head section motor
AG0022 1 Adjustable thigh section motor
AG0023
AG0025
1
1
Adjustable foot section motor
Mechanical adjustable foot section kit
55
NOTE:
The above list of recommended parts covers the different models of the LI158Bx or LI159Bx
beds and the available functions. Please check the identification label to see which model you
possess. See “Product identification label location” page 5-1

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 3
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Chassis - Brakes
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Chassis - Brakes
Figure 5-2. “Chassis - Brakes”

7
Page 5 - 4 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Chassis - Brakes
Chapter 5: Spare parts
Table 5-2. “Chassis - Brakes”

Part
Mark Quantity Name
number
1 AG0158 1 CHASSIS KIT, STRAIGHT HEAD
a

2 AG0159 1 CHASSIS KIT, CURVED HEAD


3 AG0033 1 BRAKE BAR KIT
4
5
AG0034
AG0059
a
1
1
BRAKE POSITION SWITCH KIT
EMERGENCY BRAKE BAR KIT
2
6 AG0096 EMERGENCY BRAKE BAR BEARING KIT
(SET OF 20)
a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

55

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 5
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Casters
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Casters
Figure 5-3. “Casters”

Antistatic and

6
Antistatic and steering
steering casters at the casters at the head end
head end

Positionnement
Positionnement
Antistatic
roulettes
roulettes and et
standards
standards et Antistatic and steering
steering casters
directionelle
directionelleenenat the
pied
tête casters at the foot end
foot end

7 Standard caster positioning Positioning with anti-static


casters

Page 5 - 6 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Casters
Chapter 5: Spare parts
Table 5-3. “Casters”

Part
Mark Quantity Name
number
1 AG0028 1 HEAD AND FOOT CHASSIS COVERS
a

2 AG0156 CASTER GUIDE KIT (AFTER 16.05.06)


3 VI0331S M8 H SCREWS (x50)
4
5
VI0367S
141378S
NYLSTOP M8 NUTS(x50)
L14*50 M8 H SCREWS (x50)
2
150 mm diameter single band casters
6 AG0057 3 150 MM DIAMETER SINGLE BAND CASTER KIT
7 AG0029 1 150 MM DIAMETER SINGLE BAND STEERING
CASTER KIT

6 AG0057
150 mm diameter single band, anti-static casters
1 150 MM DIAMETER SINGLE BAND CASTER KIT
3
7 AG0029 1 150 MM DIAMETER SINGLE BAND STEERING
CASTER KIT
8 AG0031 2 150 MM DIAMETER SINGLE BAND ANTI-STATIC
CASTER KIT

4
150 mm diameter double band casters
9 AG0058 3 150 MM DIAMETER DOUBLE BAND CASTER KIT
10 AG0030 1 150 MM DIAMETER DOUBLE BAND STEERING
CASTER KIT
150 mm diameter double band, anti-static casters
9 AG0058 a
1 150 MM DIAMETER DOUBLE BAND CASTER KIT
10 AG0030 1 150 MM DIAMETER DOUBLE BAND STEERING
a

11 AG0032
a
2
CASTER KIT
150 MM DIAMETER DOUBLE BAND, ANTI-STATIC
55
CASTER KIT
125 mm diameter single band caster
12 AG0131 3 125 MM DIAMETER SINGLE BAND CASTER KIT
13 AG0132 1 125 MM DIAMETER SINGLE BAND STEERING
CASTER KIT
30° built-in casters 6
14 AG0149 3 BUILT-IN BRAKE CASTER KIT
15 AG0150 1 BUILT-IN STEERING CASTER KIT
30° built-in, anti-static casters
14 AG0149 1 BUILT-IN BRAKE CASTER KIT
15
16
AG0150
AG0151
1
2
BUILT-IN STEERING CASTER KIT
BUILT-IN ANTI-STATIC CASTER KIT 7
a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 7


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
HiLow
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 HiLow
Figure 5-4. “HiLow”

5
Table 5-4. “HiLow”

Part
6 1
Mark
number
AG16113 a
HL COLUMN KIT (40-80 CM)
Name

2 AG16110 HL COLUMN KIT (45-85 CM)


3 AG0099 COLUMN BEARING KIT
4 150620S H (A2K) 8*20 METAL SCREWS (x50)
5 VI0616S PINION WASHERS D=8*22 (x100)

7 6 147268S T20 SCREW, M5*10 (x100)


a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

Page 5 - 8 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
5th wheel
Chapter 5: Spare parts

5th wheel
Figure 5-5. “5th wheel”

55
Table 5-5. “5th wheel”

Part
Mark Name
number

6
1 AG0100 CASTER
a

2 AG0101 5TH WHEEL ACTUATORS (X2)


3 AG0102 5TH WHEEL COVER KIT
a

4 AG0103 DUCT L=500 + RECESS


a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 9
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
HiLow pedal/foot-operated control
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 HiLow pedal/foot-operated control


Figure 5-6. “HiLow pedal/foot-operated control”

6
Table 5-6. “HiLow pedal/foot-operated control”

Part
Mark Name
number
1 AG0142 INVERTED HL PEDAL KIT
2 AG0125 NURSE MODE HL PEDAL KIT
a

3 AG0146 SIMPLE NURSE MODE HL KEY KIT


a

7 4 AG0097 COLUMN GROMMETS (SET OF 20)


a

a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

Page 5 - 10 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Intermediate structure
Chapter 5: Spare parts

Intermediate structure
Figure 5-7. “Intermediate structure”

55

Table 5-7. “Intermediate structure”


6
Part
Mark Name
number
1 AG0026 INTERMEDIATE STRUCTURE KIT
a

a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.


7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 11
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Adjustable head section
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Adjustable head section


Figure 5-8. “Adjustable head section”

5 Table 5-8. “Adjustable head section”

Mark Part Name


number
1 AG0053 ADJUSTABLE HEAD SECTION KIT
a

2 AG0116 ADJUSTABLE HEAD SECTION MOTOR +CABLE KIT

6 3
4
AG0050
AG0114
ADJUSTABLE HEAD SECTION DAMPER KIT
SKF CPR CABLE KIT
5 AG0143 OKIN CPR CABLE KIT
6 AG0144 LINAK CPR CABLE KIT
7 AG0115 CPR HANDLE KIT
8 AG8059 CPR CABLE FASTENER KIT

7 9
10
RM74803S
RM74804S
D8 DIN6799 ELASTIC RINGS (x50)
D6 ELASTIC RINGS (x50)
11 QD1545S STOP (x100)
a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

Page 5 - 12 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Adjustable thigh and foot sections
Chapter 5: Spare parts

Adjustable thigh and foot sections


Figure 5-9. “Adjustable thigh and foot sections”

55

Table 5-9. “Adjustable thigh and foot sections” 6


Mark Part Name
number
1 AG0027 KNEE BREAK KIT
a

2 AG0022 KNEE BREAK MOTOR KIT


3*
4*
AG0023
AG0025
FOOT SECTION MOTOR KIT
MECHANICAL ADJUSTABLE FOOT SECTION KIT 7
5 AG0107 ACTUATOR FASTENER KIT
a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 13


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Plastic endboard extension
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Plastic endboard extension


Figure 5-10. “Plastic endboard extension”

6 Mark Part
Table 5-10. “Plastic endboard extension”

Name
number
1 AG0039 FIXED EXTENSION KIT
a

2 AG0040 MOBILE EXTENSION KIT


a

3 AG8052 a
ACCESSORY SUPPORT KIT

7 4 AG8051 BED BUMPER KIT


a

5 AG0111 EXTENSION ASSEMBLY PARTS KIT


a

6 VI0613S 5*18 T25 SCREWS (SET OF 50)


7 QD0663S D:25 STARLOCKS (SET OF 20)

Page 5 - 14 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Wooden endboard extension
Chapter 5: Spare parts

Wooden endboard extension


Figure 5-11. “Wooden endboard extension”

55

6
Table 5-11. “Wooden endboard extension”

Part
Mark Name
number
1 AG0136 FIXED EXTENSION KIT, WOODEN
2
3
AG0137
AG0138
MOBILE EXTENSION KIT, WOODEN
SIDERAIL ASSEMBLY PARTS KIT, WOODEN
7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 15
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Electric power supply
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Electric power supply


Figure 5-12. “Electric power supply”

7
Page 5 - 16 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Electric power supply
Chapter 5: Spare parts
Table 5-12. “Electric power supply”

Part
Mark Name
number
1 AG0015 POWER CABLE, EUROPE
2 AG0016 POWER CABLE, UK
3 AG0017 POWER CABLE, SWITZERLAND
4
5
AG0078
AG0019
100 V/120 V POWER CABLE
SHOCK + BACKUP BATTERY KIT
2
6 AG0020 SHOCK BATTERY KIT
7 AG0024 BACKUP BATTERY KIT
8 AG0121 230 V POWER SUPPLY UNIT KIT FOR LI158Bx/159Bx
9 AG0076 100 V POWER SUPPLY UNIT KIT FOR LI158Bx/159B
10
11
AG0077
AG0157
120 V POWER SUPPLY UNIT KIT FOR LI158Bx/159B
POWER CABLE, ITALY/CHILE
3
12 AG0173 ORANGE POWER CABLE, GERMANY
13 156CDE30 ANTI-TRACTION KIT

55

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 17
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Control units (LCU – CP)
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Control units (LCU – CP)


Figure 5-13. “Control units (LCU – CP)”

7
Page 5 - 18 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Control units (LCU – CP)
Chapter 5: Spare parts
Table 5-13. “Control units (LCU – CP)”

Part
Mark Name
number
1 AG0083 PATIENT CP WITHOUT EASYCHAIR®
a

2 AG0085 PATIENT CP WITH EASYCHAIR®


a

3 AG0084 CAREGIVER CP WITHOUT EASYCHAIR®


a

4
5
AG0086
AG0087
a

a
CAREGIVER CP WITH EASYCHAIR®
LEFT-HAND LCU WITHOUT SHOCK FOR LI158
2
6 AG0088 LEFT-HAND LCU WITH SHOCK FOR LI158
a

7 AG0089 RIGHT-HAND LCU WITHOUT SHOCK FOR LI158


a

8 AG0090 RIGHT-HAND LCU WITH SHOCK FOR LI158


a

9 AG0154 CONTROL PENDANT CLIP


a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.
3

55

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 19
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Control unit on a flexible arm
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Control unit on a flexible arm


Figure 5-14. “Control unit on a flexible arm”

6 Mark Part
Table 5-14. “Control unit on a flexible arm”

Name
number
1 AG0091 CUFA ARM KIT FOR LI158Bx
2 AG0092 CUFA KIT WITHOUT EASYCHAIR®
a

3 AG0093 CUFA KIT WITH EASYCHAIR®


a

7 4
5
AG0094
AG0119
CUFA CIRCUIT BOX
CUFA ASSEMBLY PARTS KIT
6 AG0120 CUFA ATTACHMENT KIT
a

a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

Page 5 - 20 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Head siderails
Chapter 5: Spare parts

Head siderails
Figure 5-15. “Head siderails”

55
Table 5-15. “Head siderails”

Part

6
Mark number Name

1 AG0008 RIGHT-HAND HEAD SIDERAIL KIT


a

2 AG0011 LEFT-HAND HEAD SIDERAIL KIT


a

3 AG0108 HEAD SIDERAIL ATTACHMENT KIT


4 AG0109 SIDERAIL ASSEMBLY PARTS KIT
5 AGQ006 SIDERAIL ARTICULATION KIT
a

6
7
AGQ008
AG0130 a
CABLE CLAMPS + RINGS (SET OF 20)
ASSEMBLED CENTRAL ARM KIT 7
8 AG0166 SIDERAIL CONTROL KIT
a

a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 21


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Foot siderail attachments
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Foot siderail attachments


Figure 5-16. “Foot siderail attachments”

6 Table 5-16. “Foot siderail attachments”

Part
Mark Name
number
1 AG0161 FOOT SIDERAIL ATTACHMENT KIT
a

2 AG0110 FOOT SIDERAIL ATTACHMENT ASSEMBLY PARTS KIT

7
3 AG0112 FOOT SIDERAIL LOCK KIT
a

4 AGQ004 LEVELS (SET OF 100)


a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

Page 5 - 22 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Foot siderails
Chapter 5: Spare parts

Foot siderails
Figure 5-17. “Foot siderails”

55

Table 5-17. “Foot siderails” 6


Part
Mark Name
number
1 AG0009 RIGHT-HAND FOOT SIDERAIL KIT
a

2 AG0012 LEFT-HAND FOOT SIDERAIL KIT


a

a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.


7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 23
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Headboard, footboard and lockable footboard
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Headboard, footboard and lockable footboard


Figure 5-18. “Headboard, footboard and lockable footboard”

5
Table 5-18. “Headboard, footboard and lockable footboard”

6 Mark
Part
number
Name

1 AG0162 HEADBOARD
a

2 AG0071 FOOTBOARD BEFORE 30-08-2006


3 AG0164 FOOTBOARD AFTER 30-08-2006
4 AG0133 LOCKABLE FOOTBOARD BEFORE 30-08-2006
a

7 5
6
AG0165
AG0134 a
LOCKABLE FOOTBOARD AFTER 30-08-2006
FOOTBOARD LOCK KIT
7 AG0046 ENDBOARD TRIM
a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

Page 5 - 24 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Wooden headboards
Chapter 5: Spare parts

Wooden headboards
Figure 5-19. “Wooden headboards”

55
Table 5-19. “Wooden headboards”

Mark Part number Name


1
2
AG0141
AG0139
FRONT LEFT TUBES FOR WOODEN ENDBOARDS
WOODEN ENDBOARD CLAMP KIT
6
3 DT012 ++++ a
SEQUOIA HEADBOARD FOR BED WITH PLASTIC SIDERAILS
OR DT015 ++++ a
SEQUOIA HEADBOARD FOR BED WITH METAL SIDERAILS OR
WITHOUT SIDERAILS
4 DT013 ++++ a
SPACE HEADBOARD FOR BED WITH PLASTIC SIDERAILS
OR DT016 ++++ SPACE HEADBOARD FOR BED WITH METAL SIDERAILS OR
7
a

WITHOUT SIDERAILS
5 DT014 ++ b
HOTEL HEADBOARD
a. Specify the colour code of the wood and laminate when ordering.
b. Specify the colour code of the laminate when ordering.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 25


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Wooden endboards
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Wooden endboards
Figure 5-20. “Wooden endboards”

5
Table 5-20. “Wooden endboards”

6
Mark Part number Name
1 AG0141 FRONT LEFT TUBES FOR WOODEN ENDBOARDS
2 DP012 ++++ a
SEQUOIA FOOTBOARD
3 DP013 ++++
a
SPACE FOOTBOARD
4 DP014 ++ b
HOTEL FOOTBOARD
5 B008 ++ a
SEQUOIA HANDRAIL KIT

7 a. Specify the colour code of the wood and/or laminate when ordering.
b. Specify the colour code of the laminate when ordering.

Page 5 - 26 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Aluminum headboard
Chapter 5: Spare parts

Aluminum headboard
Figure 5-21. “Aluminum headboard”

55
Table 5-21. “Aluminum headboard”

Mark Part number Name

6
1 AG16114++ a
ALUMINUM HEADBOARD LAMINATE KIT
2 AG16115 b
HEAD CROSS MEMBER KIT
3 AG16116 b
HANDRAIL KIT
4 AG16117 b
ALUMINUM HEADBOARD KIT
5 AG16118 b
HEAD PLUG KIT
6 153974S SELF-ADHESIVE PLUGS (SET OF 10)
7 152128 HILL-ROM LABEL
a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.
7
b. Specify the colour code of the laminate when ordering.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 27


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Aluminum footboard
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Aluminum footboard
Figure 5-22. “Aluminum footboard”

5
Table 5-22. “Aluminum footboard”

Mark Part number Name

6 1
2
AG16120++
AG16119 b
a
ALUMINUM FOOTBOARD LAMINATE KIT
FOOT CROSS MEMBER KIT
3 AG16116 b
HANDRAIL KIT
4 AG16121 b
ALUMINUM FOOTBOARD KIT
5 AG16120
b
FOOT PLUG KIT
6 153974S SELF-ADHESIVE PLUGS (SET OF 10)
7 7 152128 HILL-ROM LABEL
a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.
b. Specify the colour code of the laminate when ordering.

Page 5 - 28 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Grounding - Ducts
Chapter 5: Spare parts

Grounding - Ducts
Figure 5-23. “Grounding - Ducts”

55

6
Table 5-23. “Grounding - Ducts”

Mark Part number Name


1 AG0106 GROUNDING KIT
2 AG0105 RUNNER KIT

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 29
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Hard surfaces and linen holder
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Hard surfaces and linen holder


Figure 5-24. “Hard surfaces and linen holder”

7
Page 5 - 30 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Hard surfaces and linen holder
Chapter 5: Spare parts
Table 5-24. “Hard surfaces and linen holder”

Part
Mark Name
number
1 AG0005 HEAD SECTION HARD SURFACE KIT
a

2 AG0004 SEAT SECTION HARD SURFACE KIT


a

3 AG0003 THIGH SECTION HARD SURFACE KIT


a

4
5
AG0002
AG0060
a
FOOT SECTION HARD SURFACE KIT
EXTENSION MATTRESS SUPPORT
2
6 AG0006 COMPLETE LINEN HOLDER
7 AGQ002 WIRE ARTICULATIONS FOR LINEN HOLDER
(SET OF 20)
8 VI0615S 4.2*20 T15 SCREWS (x100)
9
10
RM74803S
RM74478S
D8 DIN6799 ELASTIC RINGS (x50)
NYLON 10.5 WASHERS (x50)
3
a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

55

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 31
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Metal siderail before 06-12-2006
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Metal siderail before 06-12-2006


Figure 5-25. “Metal siderail before 06-12-2006”

7
Page 5 - 32 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Metal siderail before 06-12-2006
Chapter 5: Spare parts
Table 5-25. “Metal siderail before 06-12-2006”

Part
Mark Name
number
1 AP0026 SIDERAIL BALL JOINTS KIT
2 AP0027 HANDLE KIT
3 AP0080 BAR KIT
4
5
AP0072
AP0076
HEAD ATTACHMENT KIT BEFORE 06.12.06
RIGHT-HAND FOOT ATTACHMENT KIT
2
6 AP0077 LEFT-HAND FOOT ATTACHMENT KIT
7 AP0113 RIGHT-HAND SIDERAIL KIT BEFORE 06.12.06
8 AP0114 LEFT-HAND SIDERAIL KIT BEFORE 06.12.06
9 AP0075 SIDERAIL ATTACHMENT PARTS KIT
10
11
AP0082
QD0268S
CLAMP INDEXING KIT
SHORT RIVETS (SET OF 50)
3
12 QD0501S LONG RIVETS (SET OF 50)
13 AP0123 METAL SIDERAIL LOCK KIT

55

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 33
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Metal siderail after 06-12-2006
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Metal siderail after 06-12-2006


Figure 5-26. “Metal siderail after 06-12-2006”

7
Page 5 - 34 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Metal siderail after 06-12-2006
Chapter 5: Spare parts
Table 5-26. “Metal siderail after 06-12-2006”

Part
Mark Name
number
1 AP0026 SIDERAIL BALL JOINTS KIT
2 AP0027 HANDLE KIT
3 AP0080 BAR KIT
4
5
AP0110
AP0076
HEAD ATTACHMENT KIT AFTER 06.12.06
RIGHT-HAND FOOT ATTACHMENT KIT
2
6 AP0077 LEFT-HAND FOOT ATTACHMENT KIT
7 AP0111 RIGHT-HAND SIDERAIL KIT AFTER 06.12.06
8 AP0112 LEFT-HAND SIDERAIL KIT AFTER 06.12.06
9 AP0075 SIDERAIL ATTACHMENT PARTS KIT
10
11
AP0082
QD0268S
CLAMP INDEXING KIT
SHORT RIVETS (SET OF 50)
3
12 QD0501S LONG RIVETS (SET OF 50)
13 AP0123 METAL SIDERAIL LOCK KIT

55

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 35
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Labels
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 Labels
Figure 5-27. “Labels”

7
Page 5 - 36 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Labels
Chapter 5: Spare parts
Figure 5-28. "Label positions"

55

Table 5-27. “Labels”

Mark Part number Name 7


1 AG0042 LABELS + LEVEL KIT
a

a. Add MP to the P/N for grey beds.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 37


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
AC963: syringe-driver holder
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 AC963: syringe-driver holder


Figure 5-29. “AC963: syringe-driver holder”

5
Table 5-28. “AC963: syringe-driver holder”

Mark Part number Name

6 1
2
AP0001
AP0002
SYRINGE-DRIVER HOLDER TRAY
ENDPIECE

7
Page 5 - 38 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
AD128A: monitor stand table
Chapter 5: Spare parts

AD128A: monitor stand table


Figure 5-30. “AD128A: monitor stand table”

55
Table 5-29. “AD128A: monitor stand table”

Mark Part number Name


1
2
AP0064
AP0004
MONITOR STAND FRAME FOR AVANTGUARD
MONITOR STAND TABLE 6
2 AP0005 PARTS TO ASSEMBLE MONITOR STAND TABLE

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 39
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
AD081B: adjustable patient helper
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 AD081B: adjustable patient helper


Figure 5-31. “AD081B: adjustable patient helper”

6
Table 5-30. “AD081B: adjustable patient helper”

Mark Part number Name


1 AP0006 PATIENT HELPER HANDLE WITH REEL
2 AP0009 ADJUSTABLE PATIENT HELPER ASSEMBLY PARTS KIT
3 AP0066 PATIENT HELPER TRIM (SET OF 20)

7
Page 5 - 40 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
AD082A: telescopic IV pole with four hooks
Chapter 5: Spare parts

AD082A: telescopic IV pole with four hooks


Figure 5-32. “AD082A: telescopic IV pole with four hooks”

55

Table 5-31. “AD082A: telescopic IV pole with four hooks”


6
Mark Part number Name
1 AP0007 IV POLE HOOKS
2 AP0008 IV POLE MECHANISM
3
4
AP0002 ENDPIECE
REPLACED BY IV POLE AD165A 7
5 REPLACED BY IV POLE AD165A

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 41


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
AD142A: removable frame
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 AD142A: removable frame


Figure 5-33. “AD142A: removable frame”

6
Table 5-32. “AD142A: removable frame”

Mark Part number Name


1 AP0065 AVANTGUARD REMOVABLE FRAME
2 AP0063 FRAME ASSEMBLY PARTS KIT

7
Page 5 - 42 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
AD165A: telescopic IV pole with four hooks
Chapter 5: Spare parts

AD165A: telescopic IV pole with four hooks


Figure 5-34. “AD165A: telescopic IV pole with four hooks”

55

6
Table 5-33. “AD165A: telescopic IV pole with four hooks”

Mark Part number Name


1 131384 IV POLE HOOKS + SCREWS

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 5 - 43
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
AD165A: telescopic IV pole with four hooks
Chapter 5: Spare parts

1 NOTES:

7
Page 5 - 44 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008

Chapter 6
General procedures
Cleaning and care

ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD:


2
Always disconnect the bed before cleaning or servicing. Failure to do so could result in
equipment damage or injury. Refer to the AvantGuard® Electric Bed User Manual and
to the chapters in this manual for additional precautions.
General Cleaning
Clean the unit with a lightly dampened cloth and the disinfectants recommended by the
manufacturer. Do not put too much liquid on the parts to be cleaned or use detergents that are
3
too powerful.
Steam cleaning
Do not use any steam cleaning devices on the AvantGuard® Electric Bed. Excessive moisture
can damage mechanisms and components of the bed.
Hard to Clean Spots
To remove difficult spots or stains, we recommend that you use standard household cleansers
4
and a soft bristle brush. Always dampen excrement or reject stains in order to clean them more
easily.
Disinfecting

5
Dilute the disinfectants and/or germicides as indicated on the label.
Storing the bed
When the bed is stored for lengthy periods, it must be in the low position, covered, with the
brakes applied and in a damp-free place at a temperature between 0° and 40°. Never use the bed
as a support for storage or working purposes during storage.
Beds fitted with batteries: it is advisable to fully charge the battery every three months during
the storage period.
When a bed fitted with a battery is stored for a lengthy period, it should be connected to the
mains power supply for 10 hours in order to fully charge the battery before putting the bed into
6
service.
After lengthy storage, always allow the bed to return to ambient temperature before use.

Lubrication requirements
Certain parts of the AvantGuard® Electric Bed must be lubricated at least once a year in order to
guarantee optimal performance. Refer to the preventive maintenance schedule.
7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 6 - 1
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures

1 Preventive maintenance
WARNING:
Only facility-authorised staff is allowed to carry out the scheduled maintenance
procedures on the AvantGuard® Electric Bed. Failure to observe this recommendation
may result in injury to the personnel or users.
The AvantGuard® Electric Bed should be subject to an efficient maintenance schedule. This

2 will ensure the long life and productivity of the AvantGuard® Electric Bed and help to reduce
downtime due to excessive usage.
An annual service of the bed is advised in order to maintain its characteristics and performance.
The electric system should be inspected by an approved after sales service person on an average
of once every three years in order to ensure continuing operation in optimal condition.
The life time of the HiLow, adjustable head section, adjustable thigh section and adjustable foot
section motors is 5 years. The life time of the power supply unit, the control pendant, the control

3 unit on a flexible arm and the gas-powered actuators is 5 years of typical use. These systems
must be replaced at the end of the indicated life times.

7
Page 6 - 2 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures
Preventive Maintenance Schedule
The following preventive maintenance schedule is a quick-reference guide intended to help
technicians with the preventive maintenance procedures of the AvantGuard® Electric Bed.
Check every part in the schedule and respect the order of the table. Make all necessary
adjustments during the preventive maintenance process.
The preventive maintenance schedule must be used together with the following preventive
maintenance checklist. This checklist is designed to permanently record the maintenance and all
repair costs regarding the AvantGuard® Electric Bed. Keeping accurate registers and correctly
maintaining the AvantGuard® Electric Bed and its accessories are the best ways of minimising
unavailability of the bed, satisfying the personnel and achieving optimal performance.
2
Table 6-1. Preventive Maintenance Schedule

Function Procedure
Overall Check the overall condition of the bed.
condition, frame
and welded
assemblies
Check that the structure and welded assemblies are in good
working condition and that there are no impacts or corrosion.
Make any necessary repairs or touch up the paint
3
(see page 4-1). Replace if necessary.
Observe the symmetry of the bed and check that the bed frame
and base are not twisted. Make any necessary repairs and
touch up the paint.
Check that all labels are installed and replace them if necessary

Headboard and
(see Chapter 5).
Check the appearance, attachment and safety of the headboard
4
footboard and footboard. Replace if necessary.
Power Check that there are no cuts, scrapes, or breaks in the AC
cable power cable or connector. Replace the cable if necessary.

66

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 6 - 3
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures

1 Function
Grounding
Procedure
- Check the condition of the bed's grounding springs. Replace
resistance them if they are damaged or cut.
- Measure the ground resistance between the ground terminal
of the mains power connector and the following points (bare
metal):
• Point 1: Equipotential terminal (A) (see figure 6-1)
2 • Point 2: Head end high column screw (B) (see figure 6-1)
• Point 3 & 4: Left- and right-hand siderail retaining screws
(C) (see figure 6-2)
• Point 5: grounding blade in the IV pole socket at the foot
end (D) (see figure 6-3)
This check must be made using a PAT or a DMM.
The value must be less than 0.2 ohm.

3 Figure 6-1. Equipotential terminal and column screw

4 2320-r3_601

Figure 6-2. Siderail retaining screws

5
2320-r3_602

Figure 6-3. Grounding blade in the IV pole socket

6
D

7
2320-r3_603

Page 6 - 4 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures

Function Procedure
Leakage current Disconnect the bed from the mains power supply.
Connect the bed mains connector to the tester and then connect
the tester to the mains power supply.
Check that the bed is correctly powered by the test device: the
lights on the control unit are on (unlock the functions if
necessary).
Measure the leakage current measures without operating any
function. 2
The value must be less than 500 µA.
Check the power cable and power supply unit if the value is
outside of the specifications.
Replace the cable or the power supply unit if necessary.
- At the end of the test, reconnect the mains power.
Power supply
unit
Check the installation of the power supply unit and replace any
damaged or missing parts.
Open the power supply unit and (refer to procedure 4.2) check
3
the connections and cable ways.
Connect the mains power cable to the wall socket and check
that the power light on the caregiver CP and/or the control unit
on a flexible arm is on.
Unlock and activate the different functions and check that the
corresponding motors are activated.
If necessary, replace the unit or troubleshoot if in doubt. 4
Power supply Disconnect the mains power cable.
unit with battery Switch on the battery power and check that the power light on
the caregiver CP and/or the control unit on a flexible arm is on.
Activate the different functions, and apply a load if possible,
and check that the corresponding motors are activated.
Charge the battery or replace it if necessary.
Troubleshoot in the event of a doubt. 5

66

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 6 - 5
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures

1 Function Procedure
Lateral caregiver Check the condition of the keyboards. Replace the LCUs if
unit necessary.
Check the condition of the female connector behind the LCU.
Switch on the Caregiver mode and check that the lights come
on when the functions are locked.
Check that the lights go off when the functions are unlocked.
2 “Shock” function: switch on the Shock function and check that
the bed moves to the Trendelenburg position and that the head
section descends. Check that the movement stops when the
control is released.
Bed with backup battery: disconnect the bed from the mains
and move the different sections through complete cycles. The
“Battery low” light should come on after a while. Note that the

3
number of cycles depends on the battery charge level.
Proceed with the same operations on both LCUs.
Replace if necessary or proceed to troubleshoot if in doubt
(where appropriate, go to RAP 2.2, RAP 2.13 or RAP 2.8 in
Chapter 2).
Control pendant* Disconnect the control pendant from the LCU and check the
condition of the connector. Reconnect or replace the control
unit if necessary.

4 Switch on the Caregiver mode sequence, lock out all the


functions and check that the patient functions no longer work.
Leave the Caregiver mode switched on, unlock all the
functions and check that the patient functions now work.
Test the two T/RT function buttons and check that they actuate
the right function.
Switch off the Caregiver mode.

5
Test each button to make sure that they activate the
corresponding function and make sure that they do not
function intermittently by pressing and holding each button for
several seconds. All movements must be continuous.
Replace the control unit if necessary.
Troubleshoot if in doubt (see RAP 2.2).

Control unit on a Perform the same tests as for the control pendant.

6 flexible arm* Replace if necessary.


Troubleshoot if in doubt (see RAP 2.2).

7
Page 6 - 6 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures

Function Procedure
HiLow (HL) Check that the screws are present and fully tightened and that
columns the columns are correctly installed.
Fully raise and lower the bed frame. Make sure there is no
friction or abnormal noise and that no audible overload
indication can be heard during the movement.
Check that the light indicating that the bed is not in the
lowered position on the control unit comes on and goes off
when the bed is in the lowered position. 2
In the event of malfunction, replace the faulty column(s).
Troubleshoot if in doubt (see RAP 2.4).
HiLow pedals* Use the two pedals to raise and lower the bed and check that
the right functions are actuated.
Switch on the Caregiver mode and check that the light on the
CP and/or the CUFA comes on.
Check that the light goes off when the function is switched off.
Replace the pedals if necessary.
3
Retractable head Check the installation of the motor and make sure that the pins
section motor and Truarc® retaining clips are present.
a

Fully raise and lower the corresponding section. Make sure


there is no friction or abnormal noise and that no audible

4
overload indication can be heard during the movement.
Replace in the event of malfunction.
Retractable head Check the installation of the hard surface and make sure that
section and the pins and Truarc® retaining clips are present.
corresponding Fully raise and lower the head section.
hard surface Check that the articulation moves by about 10 cm along the
bed frame during the elevation movement.
Also check that the hard surface slides by about 4 cm on the
section during the movement.
Make sure that the hard surface and its drive system under the
head section are in good condition.
5
Make sure there is no friction or abnormal noise.
Replace any damaged parts (refer to procedure 4.4).
Hard surfaces of Remove each hard surface and check its condition (see
the bed frame procedure 4.3 and procedure 4.4).
Replace as necessary.
66

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 6 - 7
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures

1 Function
CPR control
Procedure
Inspect the installation of the handles, cable and CPR
mechanism on the AHS motor.
Check that the screws are present and fully tightened.
Inspect the two handles, cable and CPR mechanism on the
AHS motor.
Press the Raise HS control on the control unit until the section
2 is fully raised, then press one of the CPR controls. Make sure
that the head section lowers. Do the same tests on the other
side of the bed.
Release the CPR handles and make sure the mechanism locks
correctly by activating the Raise AHS control for a few
seconds. The elevation movement must be observed.
Replace the AHS motor assembly in the event of malfunction

3
or a broken cable.
Retractable head Inspect the installation of the dampers. Check that the screw is
section dampers present and fully tightened.
Check that there is no oil on the shaft.
Press the Raise HS control on the CP until the section is fully
raised, then press one of the CPR controls. Check that the HS
descends quickly to the intermediate position and then slowly
into the lowered position.

4 Replace the dampers if necessary (refer to procedure 4.23).


Adjustable thigh Inspect the installation of the motor. Make sure the pins and
section (ATS) Truarc® (circlips) retaining rings are present.
motor Fully raise and lower the thigh section. Make sure there is no
friction or abnormal noise and that no audible overload
indication can be heard during the movement.
Replace in the event of malfunction (refer to procedure 4.14).

5 Autocontour Make sure the TS rises to mid-height when the Raise HS


button is pressed in the low position, and that it lowers
automatically when the Lower HS function is activated and
that the HS reaches the low position.
If necessary, troubleshoot and replace the faulty motor or unit
(see (refer to procedure 2.6)).

7
Page 6 - 8 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures

Function Procedure
Adjustable foot Raise the TS to mid-height.
section motor Inspect the installation of the AFS motor. Make sure the pins
(AFS) and Truarc® (circlips) retaining rings are present.
Fully raise and lower the foot section.
Make sure there is no friction or abnormal noise and that no
audible overload indication can be heard during the
movement.
Replace if you hear any unusual noises or in the event of a 2
malfunction.
EasyChair® Check that the EasyChair®, AHS, ATS and AFS functions are
function unlocked.
Switch on the EasyChair function and check that all three
sections move into the required position.
Return the sleep surface to the flat position. Check that the
three sections return to the flat position and that the bed
descends to the lowered position.
3
Troubleshoot in the event of a malfunction (refer to procedure
2.11).
Mechanical Raise the ATS to mid-height.
adjustable foot Check that the foot actuator and the control handle are

4
section correctly installed.
Make sure the pins and Truarc® (circlips) retaining rings are
present and that the retaining and adjusting screws are tight.
Raise and lower the foot section by hand once the handle has
been actuated. The AFS must rise on its own when the handle
is actuated. A certain effort is required when lowering the foot
section by hand.
Make sure there is no friction or abnormal noise when the
section moves and that the movement is restrained when
lowering.
Check that the section is locked in place when the handle is
5
released.
Check that there is no oil on the actuator shaft.
Replace the actuator assembly is necessary (refer to procedure
4.24).
Trendelenburg/ Switch on the Caregiver mode on the LCU.
Reverse
Trendelenburg*
Place the sleep surface in the Trendelenburg position. Make
sure there is no friction or abnormal noise and that no audible 66
overload alarms sound during the movement.
Place the bed in the Reverse Trendelenburg position. Make
sure there is no friction or abnormal noise and that no audible
overload alarms sound during the movement.
Switch off the Caregiver mode.

7
Replace the defective part in the event of any unusual noises or
if the mechanism jams.
Troubleshoot in the event of a malfunction (refer to procedure
2.12).

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 6 - 9


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures

1 Function
“Shock”
Procedure
Place the bed in the EasyChair position with the sleep surface
function* in the horizontal position.
Switch on the Shock function using the two LCUs in turn.
Make sure that the sleep surface moves to the Trendelenburg
position and that the HS, TS and FS move to the flat position
without any friction or abnormal noise and that no audible
2 overload alarms sound during the movement.
Place the sleep surface in the horizontal position, then
disconnect the bed from the mains. Also disconnect the backup
battery if present. Switch on the Shock function again and
check that it still works without the mains power supply.
Reconnect the backup battery, if present.
If necessary, recharge the Shock function battery or replace it if

3
the function only works with the mains power supply.
Troubleshoot in the event of a malfunction (refer to procedure
2.14).
Check the date on the batteries. It is advisable to replace the
battery if it is more than five years old.
Operation with Make sure that the bed is disconnected from the mains and
battery backup* activate all functions using the control unit.
Charge the backup batteries or replace them if necessary.

4 Troubleshoot in the event of a malfunction (refer to procedure


2.9).
Always check the date on the battery parts. It is advisable to
replace the battery if it is more than five years old.
Structure and Make sure the head and foot siderails are not bent or split.
attachment of the Check that the rotation and release system of each foot siderail
plastic siderails is in good working order.

5 Fold away the foot siderails and check that the release control
of each head siderail works properly.
Check the condition of the elevation mechanism of each head
siderail.
Check that they lock firmly into place in the raised position by
applying a sideways force. The siderail guide shafts are self-
lubricating.
Check the condition of the release cable and that the plastic

6 shoe and the cable clamp are present.


Replace the foot siderails or the head siderails subassembly or
the central arm if necessary (see procedure 4.25 or 4.26 or
4.26).

7
Page 6 - 10 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures

Function Procedure
Plastic foot Fold away the foot siderails on the head siderails.
siderail support Check the installation of the foot siderail supports and make
sure the springs, pins and Truarc® rings are present and that
the retaining screws are tight.
Actuate the release latch of each siderail support, lower the
siderail and then raise it again, making sure that it clicks firmly
into place.
Unfold the foot siderails on the supports and check that the 2
siderail lock mechanism on each support functions correctly.
Check the condition of the siderail articulations (head and foot
siderail articulations).
Check that the T/RT angle indicators function correctly.
Replace if necessary (refer to procedure 4.28).
Structure and Make sure the siderails are not bent or split.
attachment of the Check that the rotation and release system of each siderail is in
metal siderails good working order.
3
Check that the attachment screws are secure.
Fold away the foot siderails and check that the release control
of each siderail works properly.
Check that they lock firmly into place in the raised position by
applying a longitudinal force.

Extension*
Replace the siderails if necessary (see procedure 4.25).
Actuate the extension to make sure that it can be moved
4
correctly and that it locks firmly into the different positions
when the handle is released.
Lubricate the guide rails with medical Vaseline (see “Tool and
supply requirements” page 4-1).
Replace any missing or damaged parts (refer to procedure

Linen holder*
4.33).
Check that the linen holder functions correctly.
Replace any missing or damaged parts if necessary (refer to
5
procedure 4.32).
Articulations Check the bed articulations for noise (HL column, AHS and
ATS bearings).
Retractable Unfold each egress handle and make sure they lock into the
egress handle* raised position.
Actuate each release handle and check that the corresponding
egress handle folds away correctly.
66
Replace if necessary.
Casters Check for cuts, wear and quality of the tread, etc. Replace is
necessary (refer to procedure 4.21).

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 6 - 11
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures

1 Function
Braking and
Procedure
Check the brakes to see whether the bed moves when the brake
steering bar is pressed. Adjust if necessary (see procedure 4.21).
Check the activation of the steering mechanism. Replace or
adjust the steering control parts of the steering caster if
necessary.
Replace the caster if necessary (refer to procedure 4.20).
2 Controlled-
operation 5th
Check that the 5th wheel locks firmly into place when the bed
is moved forwards or backwards and that it is released when a
wheel system* sideways force is applied. Check the dampers for oil leaks and
the condition of the caster tread.
Replace any damaged parts if necessary (refer to procedure
4.22).
Bed connected to Connect the bed to the mains power supply and set the brake

3 mains, brake not bar to the neutral position. An audible alarm should sound.
applied
detection*
Apply the brakes. The audible alarm should stop.
Troubleshoot in the event of a malfunction (see procedure
2.15).
Accessory Check the position of each bar on the bed and make sure that
support bar and the retaining screws are tight.
medical device Replace any missing or damaged parts if necessary (see

4 support bar*
Administrative
tasks
procedure 7.1 or procedure 7.2).
Complete all required administrative tasks.

a. Truarc® is a registered trademark of Waldes Truarc, Inc.

7
Page 6 - 12 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures
Preventive maintenance checklist
Table 6-2. Preventive maintenance checklist

Date
Functions
Hill-Rom
Manufacturer:

Overall appearance

2
Headboard and footboard
Power cable
Resistance to earth
Leakage current
Power supply unit
Lateral caregiver unit

3
Control pendant
Model number

Control unit on a flexible


arm
HiLow columns

HiLow
pedal
Adjustable head section
4
motor
AHS
Serial number

Hard surfaces of the bed


frame

5
CPR control
Autocontour
Adjustable foot section
motor
EasyChair function
Labour time:

66
Total cost of
this page

Cost of repair:

Inspected by:
Notes:
N = Not applicable
O = OK
Replacement
R = Repair/
A = Adjustment
N = Cleaning
L = Lubrication
Key:

7
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 6 - 13
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Preventive maintenance
Chapter 6: General procedures

1 Date
Functions
Hill-Rom
Manufacturer:

Mechanical adjustable
foot section
Trendelenburg/Reverse
Trendelenburg

2 “Shock” function
Battery backup
Siderail structure
Foot siderail supports
Model number

Extension

3 Linen holder
Articulations
Egress handles
Casters
Braking and steering

4
5th wheel steering system
Serial number

Brake detection off

Accessory support bar and


medical device support bar
Administrative tasks

5 Labour time:
Total cost of
this page

Cost of repair:

6 Inspected by:
N = Not applicable
O = OK
Replacement
R = Repair/
A = Adjustment
N = Cleaning
L = Lubrication
Key:

7
Page 6 - 14 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008

Chapter 7
Accessories
Accessories
WARNING:
Only the accessories specifically identified below can to be used on the AvantGuard®
Electric Bed. Any use of accessories not included in the list may compromise the safety
2
of the bed.
WARNING:
Consult the User Manual of the AvantGuard® Electric Bed before using the
accessories to prevent any risk of injury to the patient or user.

Part number
Table 7-1. Recap list.
Description
3
AC908A 2-receptacle bottle holder
AC932A Stainless steel bottle holder, 1 litres
AC938A Stainless steel bottle holder, 2 litres
AC961A Stainless steel bottle holder, 3 litres
AD016A
AC991A
AC959A
Semi-spherical drainage holder (France)
Triangular section drainage holder
Pivoting oxygen cylinder holder for B5 bottle (Ø150 mm)
4
AC962A Pivoting stainless steel bottle holder, 3 litres
AD101A Pivoting oxygen cylinder holder for D bottle (Ø110 mm)
AD102A Pivoting oxygen cylinder holder for E bottle (Ø110 mm)
AC963A Syringe-driver holder
AC968A
AD080B
Equipotential connecting cable
Chrome-plated patient helper 5
AD081C Adjustable patient helper
AD082A Telescopic, curved stainless steel IV pole
AD165A Stainless steel telescopic IV pole
AC953A Chrome-plated IV hooks on patient helper
AD128A monitor stand table
AC923A Label holder
AD126A Accessory support bar kit
AD127A Medical device support bar kit
AD069A Bultex® comfort mattress
AD162A Extension cushion for Bultex® comfort mattress
AD066A Cliniplot® III mattress

77
AD076A Extension cushion for Cliniplot® III mattress
AD085A Primo™ dynamic low-pressure mattress system
AD117A01 Clinisert® 2 mattress
(high-resilience insert and sewn and taped cover)

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 7 - 1


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
Accessories
Chapter 7: Accessories

1 Part number
AD118A01 Clinisert® 2 mattress
Description

(high-resilience insert/welded cover)


AD119A01 Clinisert® 2 mattress
(visco-elastic insert/sewn and taped cover)
AD120A01 Clinisert® 2 mattress
(visco-elastic insert/welded cover)

2 AD164A
AD140A
AD142A
Extension cushion for Clinisert® 2
Duo® 2 multi-mode mattress system
AvantGuard® Electric Bed removable frame
AC806A IV pole support, 5-arm base
9099007A Walking stick holder
AD177A MobiBar® egress handle kit
AD135A Self-steering 5th wheel kit

3 AD180A
AD166A
5th wheel with controlled operation
Control unit on flexible arm without EasyChair®
AD174A Control unit on flexible arm with EasyChair®
AD167A Control pendant for patient without EasyChair®
AD168A Control pendant for nursing staff without EasyChair®
AD175A Control pendant for patient with EasyChair®
AD176A Control pendant for nursing staff with EasyChair®

4 AD137A
AD171A
HiLow pedal kit
HiLow pedal kit with caregiver mode
AD139A Linen holder
AD128A Monitor stand
AD178A Long metal siderails
AD179A Enable control pedal kit

5
AD138A Extension kit

7
Page 7 - 2 AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
7.1 Accessory support bar kit - AD126A
Chapter 7: Accessories
7.1 Accessory support bar kit - AD126A
This kit contains the accessory support bars and the parts needed to install them on the bed.
11
Note that only one accessory support bar can be installed if a medical device support bar is also
required (different kit).
It includes:
• Two accessory support bars (left and right)
• Four guides
• Four retaining screws

Figure 7-1. Accessory support bar kit

Identification: (see figure 3-1 page 3-1)


2320_700
5
Time required: 10 minutes
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:Yes
Tools required: One 6 mm Allen® key 1

77
1. Allen® is a registered trademark of Industrial Fasteners, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 7 - 3


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
7.1 Accessory support bar kit - AD126A
Chapter 7: Accessories

1 Installation
1. Check the contents of the kit.
2. Lock the bed in the raised position with the sleep surface in the horizontal position and the
siderails raised.
3. Secure the bed (see procedure 4.1 page 4-3).
4. Position the two guides (A) in the holes provided in one of the accessory support bars (B)
and present the assembly in front of the holes provided in the left- or right-hand side of the
bed frame. Note that the shaft (C) of each support bar must be at the head end of the bed (see
figure 7-2 page 7-4).

Figure 7-2. Attaching the accessory support bar

3
C
B

4 A

D 2320_701

5
5. Install the two retaining screws (D) of the accessory support bars and tighten using the 6 mm
Allen® key.
1

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to install the other accessory support bar on the other side of the bed
frame.
Removal
Perform the installation procedure in reverse order.

7
1. Allen® is a registered trademark of Industrial Fasteners, Inc.

Page 7 - 4 Service Manual Electric Bed AvantGuard® - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
7.2 Medical device support bar kit - AD127A
Chapter 7: Accessories
7.2 Medical device support bar kit - AD127A
This kit contains the medical device support bars and the parts needed to install them on the bed.
11
Note that only one medical device support bar can be installed if an accessory support bar is also
required (different kit).
It includes:
• Two medical device support bars (left and right)
• Four guides
• Four retaining screws

Figure 7-3. Medical device support bar kit

4
2320_702

Identification:
Time required:
(see figure 3-1 page 3-1)
10 minutes
5
Number of persons: 1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:Yes
Tools required: One 6 mm Allen® key
1

77
1. Allen® is a registered trademark of Industrial Fasteners, Inc.

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 7 - 5


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
7.2 Medical device support bar kit - AD127A
Chapter 7: Accessories

1 Installation
1. Check the contents of the kit.
2. Lock the bed in the raised position with the sleep surface in the horizontal position and the
siderails raised.
3. Secure the bed (see procedure 4.1 page 4-3).
4. The medical device support bars are installed in the same place as the accessory support bars
and are attached in the same manner.

5. Position the two guides (A) in the holes provided in one of the accessory support bars (B)
and present the assembly in front of the holes provided in the left- or right-hand side of the
bed frame. Note that the shaft (C) of each support bar must be at the head end of the bed (see
figure 7-4 page 7-6).

3 6. Install the two retaining screws (D) of the accessory support bars and tighten using the 6 mm
Allen® key.
1

7. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to install the other accessory support bar on the other side of the bed
frame.

Figure 7-4. Attaching the medical device support bars

5
B

A
D

6
C A
2320_703
D

Removal
Perform the installation procedure in reverse order.

7
1. Allen® is a registered trademark of Industrial Fasteners, Inc.

Page 7 - 6 Service Manual Electric Bed AvantGuard® - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
7.3 MobiBar® egress handle kit – AD134A
Chapter 7: Accessories
7.3 MobiBar® egress handle kit – AD134A
This kit contains the two egress handles and the parts needed to install them on the bed.
11
It includes:
• Two egress handles (left and right)
• Four retaining bolts
• Four washers
• Two retaining cylinders
• One label

Figure 7-5. MobiBar® egress handle kit

4
2320_704

Identification: (see figure 3-1 page 3-1)


Time required:
Number of persons:
10 minutes
1 5
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:yes
Tools required: One 13mm ratchet wrench

Installation
1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the head, thigh and foot sections flat in the
horizontal position. Raise the foot siderails. 6
2. Secure the bed (see procedure 4.1 page 4-3).
3. Remove the FS hard surface (see procedure 4.3 page 4-5).

4. Remove the extension (see procedure 4.33 page 4-64)

77
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 7 - 7
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
7.3 MobiBar® egress handle kit – AD134A
Chapter 7: Accessories

1 Figure 7-6. Removing the egress handle

3
2320_705

4 5. Present one of the egress handles (A) in front of the attachment provided on the bed frame
(see figure 7-6 page 7-8).

6. Insert the two retaining screws (B) and washers (C) and tighten them with the 13 mm ratchet
wrench.

7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to install the other egress handle on the other side of the bed frame.

5
Removal
Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

7
Page 7 - 8 Service Manual Electric Bed AvantGuard® - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
7.4 Control unit on a flexible arm kit AD166A - AD174A
Chapter 7: Accessories
7.4 Control unit on a flexible arm kit AD166A - AD174A
This kit contains the control unit on a flexible arm and the parts needed to install them on the
11
bed.
It includes:
• A control unit on a flexible arm
• A threaded knob with nut
• Two cable supports/plastic ducts
• Four retaining screws for cables/ducts
• Two plastic clamps

Figure 7-7. Control unit on a flexible arm

4
2320_706

5
Identification: (see figure 3-1 page 3-1)
Time required: 15 minutes
Number of persons: 1 (plus 1 occasionally)
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:no
Tools required: One medium-sized cross-tip screwdriver
One pair of cutting pliers

Installation 6
1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the sleep surface in the horizontal position.

2. Raise the AHS and the siderails and remove the headboard.

3. Secure the bed (refer to procedure 4.1).


4. Remove the SS and TS hard surfaces (refer to procedure 4.3).

5. Remove the cable shield (A) from the central rail on the bed frame (see figure 7-8 page
77
7-10).

AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 7 - 9


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
7.4 Control unit on a flexible arm kit AD166A - AD174A
Chapter 7: Accessories

1 Figure 7-8. Attachment of the control unit on a flexible arm

2320_707 2320_708

3 6. Position the arm of the control unit in relation to the hard surface and insert the threaded
retaining knob (B) with the clevis. Tighten the assembly.

7. Slightly push the centre of the hard surface of the AHS in order to release it from the AHS
structure and insert the plug in the opening provided (C).

8. Install the two supports (D) and tighten the corresponding screws using the medium cross-
tip screwdriver.

4 9. Place the control unit on a flexible arm in the central rail (I) of the bed frame (see figure 7-9
page 7-10) while holding the cable close to the AHS articulation (see figure 7-8 page 7-10).

10. On the left-hand LCU (E), identify the socket for the control unit on a flexible arm connector
(F) and cut the plastic clamps (G) on the cross member (H) (see figure 7-9 page 7-10).

11. Position the cable of the control unit on a flexible arm under the cross member, by following
the LCU cable and attach the two cables to one another using two new plastic clamps.
5 12. Connect the connector (F).

Figure 7-9. Attaching the CUFA cable to the bed frame

G H

6 I

7 F
2320_709

Page 7 - 10 Service Manual Electric Bed AvantGuard® - QD2320(3)


PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
7.4 Control unit on a flexible arm kit AD166A - AD174A
Chapter 7: Accessories
13. Return the cable shield (A) to the central rail on the bed frame (see figure 7-8 page 7-10).

14. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.


11
Removal
Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

77
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 7 - 11
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
7.5 HiLow pedal kit - AD137A* or AD171A*
Chapter 7: Accessories

1 7.5 HiLow pedal kit - AD137A* or AD171A*


This kit contains the two HiLow pedals and the parts needed to install them on the bed.
It includes:
• Two HL pedals
• Two ducts
• Two retaining bolts

Figure 7-10. HiLow pedal

3
2320_710

Identification: (see figure 3-1 page 3-1)

4 Time required:
Number of persons:
15 minutes
1
Possibility of intervening when the patient is in the bed:yes
Tools required: One small flat screwdriver
One 13 mm ratchet wrench

5 Installation
1. Lock the bed in the raised position with the head, thigh and foot sections flat in the
horizontal position. Raise the foot siderails.

2. Secure the bed (see procedure 4.1 page 4-3).

3. Remove the strip from the adhesive part and stick the two ducts (A) under the chassis tubes
with the opening facing inwards (one on each side) between the pedal support(B) and the
6 chassis cover at the foot end (C) (see figure 7-11 page 7-13)

7
Page 7 - 12 Service Manual Electric Bed AvantGuard® - QD2320(3)
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
7.5 HiLow pedal kit - AD137A* or AD171A*
Chapter 7: Accessories
Figure 7-11. Duct and foot cover
11
C
B

2320_711

4. Pre-assemble the retaining screw with the washer on each pedal.

5. Fully insert the two pedals in the supports (B) with the washer under the support (B), then
tighten and lock the screws (D) using the 13 mm wrench, taking care not to pinch the cable
(see figure 7-12 page 7-13).

Figure 7-12. Attaching the HL pedal to the chassis 3


B

D
4
2320_712

6. Remove the two plugs at the base of the foot HL column (see figure 4-27 page 4-33).
7. Open the ducts on the tubes and the foot cross member using the small screwdriver and
insert the pedal cables. Close the ducts.
5
8. Connect the pedal cables to the connectors at the base of the foot HL column (see figure 4-
27 page 4-33).

9. Return the two plugs to the base of the foot HL column.

10. Perform the “Function Checks” page 2-4 in this manual.

Removal
6
Perform the removal procedure in the reverse order.

77
AvantGuard® Electric Bed Service Manual - QD2320(3) Page 7 - 13
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT 08 October 2008
7.5 HiLow pedal kit - AD137A* or AD171A*
Chapter 7: Accessories

1 NOTES:

7
Page 7 - 14 Service Manual Electric Bed AvantGuard® - QD2320(3)

Вам также может понравиться